Episode 210: How To Generate Leads With Pinterest Stories, Videos and Hashtags – with Laura Rike

Laura Rike SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Grab Laura’s Pinterest Toolkit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz


Pinterest could be the sleeper tool you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. Pinterest is not a social media platform but a powerful tool that can increase website visits and bring you great new clients. But, few companies know how to use Pinterest. This episode covers the 101 of how to use Pinterest stories, videos, hashtags and more.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to use Pinterest stories 
  2. Have a starting plan to use Pinterest
  3. Understand the 101 of how to get started

Resources Mentioned:

Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey everybody. Welcome back to episode number 210 on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Thanks so much for tuning in today. Happy January, 2021. We obviously just finished commitment week 2021 for entrepreneurs and small business owners.


And we had our fourth podcast anniversary birthday last week. So first of all, great way to kick off 2021. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show for the last four years and keeping us a top of the charts for business development online for entrepreneurs. We love you guys. If you haven’t had a chance to yet, please cruise over and leave us a review on Apple podcasts,


or just simply share this podcast from your Spotify up to your Instagram stories, or share this on LinkedIn. We appreciate you spreading the word about this show and just honestly how awesome you guys are as listeners. I get direct messages from many of you on Instagram and on LinkedIn, and just appreciate them so much. So we’re kicking off our fourth year with more proven business trainings that you can take to the bank.


We are known for giving you business steps and strategies that coaches charge thousands of dollars for. And it’s all totally proven. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs for 24 years and the guests that also come on the show are proven experts in their space. So I’m so glad to turn you over to another guest expert on today’s show. We’re talking about how to generate leads with Pinterest stories,


videos, and hashtags. And let me give you a quick little backstory. I don’t do Pinterest. I’m not the Pinterest kind of girl whatsoever from a business strategy standpoint though. I definitely want to be where our clients are in where it’s a great place for our company to be, which is called the sweet life company for people to access our resources in the content that we distribute here on the podcast.


And so last year we got on Pinterest. We recorded a show about Pinterest with a guest expert, and my team quickly got to work implementing all those steps in our Pinterest engagement grew by something crazy. It was like 813%, which could be two things. Number one, it could show you how terrible we were at Pinterest before. So, you know,


there’s only way only one way to go is up or the strategies once are implemented with Pinterest. You can see almost instant results when you’re using Pinterest correctly. But with that being said full transparency, I still am not great at Pinterest. I’m grateful to have a team that does Pinterest. I’m not really on Pinterest. And so as an entrepreneur, I had a lot of questions for our expert today on,


you know, really who should be on Pinterest? What can you do on there? And especially all the new Pinterest stories feature. So on today’s show, we are talking to you guys about the fact that Pinterest could be that sleeper tool that you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. It’s not a social media platform. We’ll talk about that in today’s show,


but it’s really a great way to get eyes on your business and have people land on your website and increase your website, traffic and therefore generating leads. But honestly not a lot of companies are still leveraging Pinterest really well. So inter today’s expert, Laura rag is in the house today and she’s at Pinterest powerhouse who helps high performing business owners, content, creators,


and influencers grow profitability the right way with sustainable systems using Pinterest. She’s helped clients and students bring in over $50,000 in monthly revenue with her strategies. I mean, she’s really rad. You guys are gonna love her. And she’s been featured as a guest on podcasts like tailwind, ultimate marketer, twin cities, collective, and small business revival. And Laura lives in Minnesota with her family.


And she can be found@laurareich.com and we’ll of course, make sure all the links and everything we’re talking about in today’s show are going to be available for you guys in the show notes. If you’re new here then just so you know, you can find all the show notes and all the bonuses that we deliver with this podcast, by going to Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast,


and then you can click on the podcast number, or you can just type in the number of the podcast in our search bar. This is episode number 210. So welcome here to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. And just a little bit of housekeeping before we dive into today’s show, if you haven’t yet held your seat or joined the early registration waitlist for my,


your signature offer masterclass, that is coming in February. So now is the time to get on that wait list. It’s a two half day intensive, so not two and a half days, but it’s two half day intensive that I’m going to be teaching in the middle of February. And this is going to teach you how to extract your own intellectual property.


Take a look at all the assets and all the great things you’ve created, and we are going to together build your signature program. Course mastermind, membership, whatever the business model of that is, we’re going to help you extract it all and create it into a signature offer. That’s perfect. Should give you the results that you want. Make sure that you’re joining that early registration list by cruising over to signature offer.com.


Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast training.<inaudible> I’m super excited to be here with Laura Reich. And I will say that we did reschedule this episode because we’re both moms and that is what happens in our life. And Laura, you guys have to see this behind the scenes, this video, make sure you go to our YouTube channel and to our Pinterest,


there’ll be videos on there because she is glowing because she is beautifully eight months pregnant. And we had to make sure we recorded this show before baby, right. Number three, arrived. So we’re, we’re getting this out of here for you, Laura, welcome to the show. Thanks so much to everybody. A little bit about yourself. Yeah, for sure.


I thank you so much for having me. I am a mom of two boys with a girl on the way. So we are so super excited over here in this neck of the woods. And I am a VA gone rogue is what I call myself. So I used to try to do all the things and with a family that doesn’t work. So I picked one thing I love,


which happens to be Pinterest and design. And I have been going hard at that ever since and just love it. That’s awesome. Okay. And what is your URL? So people can find you, even though we’ll put all this in the show notes for you. Yeah, of course. It’s just Laura wrike.com. So it’s L a U R a R I K e.com.


Awesome. Okay. So today on the show I have a million Pinterest questions. So we had Melanie fountain on the show a while ago, almost a year ago, really diving into Pinterest Pinterest marketing. It was a great episode. I will say, as a case study, we took those like Pinterest one Oh one steps, and we tried them. And as a company,


we had crazy results. It was like we went from being nowhere on Pinterest, having random pins to, you know, having thousands and thousands of impressions. And it was like an 813% increase with applying some basic steps. And so I am a believer in Pinterest now, but I will also say I am completely still Pinterest illiterate because my, my team does it.


And I get questions all the time from business owners about, you know, still, should I be using this? What is this look like? What can Pinterest really do? And so today’s show is all about kind of dissecting some of those high-level business questions. So our listeners can, first of all, determine whether or not they should be in Pinterest.


So number one is this worth your time, number two, how to get started and you have a toolkit for people to get started, which I wish that we had had in the beginning, I will say for sure, you know, really what is this toolkit? How do we get started with this? But there’s so many things kind of spinning around with Pinterest.


So let’s kind of start, I would say, spinning around in my head with Pinterest. So let’s go ahead and just start with question number one. How does Pinterest rack up and compare to other social media outlets such as Instagram or LinkedIn? Yeah, for sure. Really the biggest difference is it’s not a social media platform like Instagram or LinkedIn. LinkedIn is been known for the more professional type connections and Instagram.


You have conversations and the comments and things like that. Pinterest really does not focus there. They really focus on you putting in the conversation into the copy and making sure that you have the keywords there so that people can find you when they find you. Then they read that conversation and they click through to the destination, which is where you can take it from there.


So it’s more search based and it’s more top of funnel based because you can utilize Pinterest to send it where those conversations are happening right now and bring in a wider audience over there. Okay, fascinating. So it’s SEO, it’s search engine. It’s a way to take a conversation and become the top of that question for you. Is Pinterest owned by Google or is it a Google product or something of that sort?


It is not, no, it’s separate. It actually plays off of Google’s domain authority and their own domain authority. So when you have your website and then you have a Pinterest profile or business account, right, you’re going to get more domain authority with your profile on Pinterest than you are your own website. Unless, I mean, you’re some super big wig,


but it has been around forever. Right? But like my website is not going to have as much domain authority as Pinterest. And so I really use that and play off of their authority to be able to bring people to my website. Very cool. Okay. So what businesses should be there. And so let me rephrase that question. You know, obviously who should be on Pinterest,


but as a business strategist, my brain works the other way, what buyers are on Pinterest, like who is actually looking for content to increase maybe their performance, their profit, their business ability or whatever it is. You know, we have a lot of marketing coaches, brand new coaches, video coaches, health coaches, a lot of physicians, a lot of attorneys and even a lot of CPAs that listened to our podcast are their buyers.


Absolutely. So there’s kind of two different ways that I tackle that for people. One, I am a Pinterest junkie, right. It’s my jam. So I’m always going to tell you, yes, there are buyers there to give you kind of an unbiased opinion. I tell everybody to go to the platform type in something that your buyers would be searching for,


right? Like what is the problem or the pain point that they are having and how would they find you? Other places on Google, on Facebook? Like what are they looking for? And if what pulls up underneath that search is offering or information or education that you can provide to them because you know how to do that as well. Then 1000000%, that’s where you should be listed because you’re missing that opportunity.


The other thing that I like to talk to people about is really when you’re thinking about buyers, like where are they? Right. Cause everybody has a different stage. And so we talked about this for a second too. Like, it might not be that they’re a startup or they’re established or whatever, but where do they aspire to be? So if they are someone who is earning three figures right now,


they’re not going to be looking for how to earn three figures on Pinterest. They’re going to be looking at things like how to grow your email list to earn five figure months. And that’s because they aspire to be in that position. So that’s also something that you need to kind of reverse engineer and think, okay, is my buyer talking to where they’re at right now?


Are they aspiring to be a five figure person? Are they aspiring to maybe lead a life where it’s freedom, right? And so they have more time in their day or their moms or whatever. And that’s really how you want to address it too, when you’re going about it that way too. So smart. Yes. And you know, there are always,


people want to hang out just you and I do too. We want to hang out with people that are just slightly ahead of where we are. Right? Those are, those are the best people that are going to hold our hand and grab us to the next level. And that totally makes sense that that’s the same thing people will be looking for on Pinterest as well.


How often should people post let’s actually talk about the content that should be posted on Pinterest? What is like the baseline, if you’re going to get started, this is how often you post. This is what it really looks like. Yeah. So it used to be an everything that I’m going to tell you guys here is how I handle it, right?


So I am not saying this is the end all be all. I’m not saying this is a hard and fast rule. You have to do it this way. This is what I’ve implemented for myself and my clients and my course members and things like that, where they see the results. So one of the things that I really tell people is it used to be pin 20 to 30 to 40 different times a day,


and you would pin your stuff and other people’s stuff. And really that’s not necessarily required anymore. What I teach is that you need to be consistent on the platform. So if you’re someone that’s just starting out and maybe you don’t have a ton of content out there, which I can try to prove you wrong, because there are multiple places that I can find content you have already posted online that can work for this.


But if you’re thinking content in terms of like landing page or sales page or blog posts, and you’re feeling like you don’t have a ton, then start at one or two pins a day, right? Even if it’s a time constraint, like how do I create all these pin designs? Start at one to two pins a day, then start to work your way up.


If you’re someone that’s been blogging or you have tons of an audience, and you’re looking to really expand on that and you know that you have tons of content, then start hire. We did a case study actually on my website. It showed, even though they had a smaller audience and the other account had a larger audience, one pinned, I think it was like seven times a day.


And the other one pin 21 times a day, they still saw the same incremental increases on their own accounts because they were being consistent. And it was the quality over how often they were posting that gave them that feedback to know that that was beneficial. Wow. That’s so awesome. That’s super encouraging. I know because our listeners are like thinking like, Oh shit,


20 times a day. Like, how am I going to ever do that? Like that is not ever going to happen. And so that that’s super cool to look at the case study and the stats and, and really just the incremental growth that’s happening with. What’s being posted now, little tangent, what software do you recommend that people use to manage their Pinterest?


So I go back and forth on this. I personally use tailwind. I love them dearly because they have tailwind tribes. And that’s really like a community-based where you’re sharing ideas together. And then, I mean, sharing other people’s ideas and really having that community type feel like you would on social media. The problem with me only telling you to pick one platform that I see though,


is it’s not a good fit for everybody all the time. So if you’re out there and you’re like, I’ve tried tailwind, it doesn’t work for me. I apologize that it didn’t work for you. I love them. They are amazing. But what I urge you to do is go to Pinterest and make sure that the scheduler you’re using, whether it’s ladder,


whether it’s meet Edgar or whatever is a Pinterest approved platform. Because if it’s not, you set yourself up for possibly getting marked as spam or even shut down because they might not be following Pinterest best practices. Wow. Okay. I know that is such a fear. I’m so glad you said that because people would never know, know to even look, they’ll just think,


Oh, well, because this platform offers it does works. Great. I’ll just take this one, but it is so important with not just Pinterest, all the different social media platforms that whatever schedule are you using does it does abide by their regulations. So thank you for that. And we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave some resources so that you guys can find Laura.


And then also to some of the software tools in the show notes of this show. So we’re not going to totally leave you all hanging out there with that. So this week I was on Pinterest and I have a confession to make. I am never on Pinterest. I’m not a Pinterest girl. I’m just not okay. And so this week I thought,


okay, I’m going to go ahead and post a video. I think I had posted something to a LinkedIn story downloaded, like the little five second video. And then I, you know, distributed it or long all of our, you know, Instagram and LinkedIn story channels. And then I’m like, well just sitting there on this little five second video,


why don’t I just try to put it on Pinterest? And so I went on there, not knowing even that Pinterest had stories, I was just going to post it like as a little video on there and, you know, boom, I’m sure everybody who’s listening to. This is like, yeah, duh, April Pinterest is had stories for a while.


You know, but to me that was, I was like, what, it’s another thing with this story. So what are Pinterest stories? What should be posted there? What is the purpose of a Pinterest story and how can they be leveraged in the business? Yeah, for sure. So it’s actually not something that’s entirely like completely past you, right?


So it is new. So don’t worry about that. Some people have had it around for a little while, but it has now opened up to more people. And so a lot of people are seeing the get early access symbol when they’re locking in, there are two sides of it, which is awesome. One side is the, I really feel like Pinterest is stepping up their game in terms of providing an opportunity for content creators,


to be able to tell a story better, to be able to educate more. Because when you think about it, you only have one graphic and you can only have so much on that one image to try to tell that story and capture their attention. So the purpose of stories right now is to be able to have multiple images so that they can kind of tap through.


And it’s kind of like a slideshow. I teach people to do more of like step-by-step, or this is what I’m working through or behind the scenes, or like more of that conversation visually in those stories. The only downfall to stories that I see currently, which I’m hoping they open up in the future is it’s not clickable to an actual landing page. So you wouldn’t use it like you do a static image because you can’t get them to use that referral traffic in our research that we’ve done in the past few months,


though, it really does help increase the brand awareness and authority on your account. So you will see that if you are using it, to teach people things and to educate them and to provide more information for them at the end, Pinterest puts on a follow button so they can start following you on Pinterest. And it’s really bringing in that authority from that platform.


And then we’ve also seen the link clicks and the traffic and the leads increase on the other things that we’ve been consistently putting out there because of the help with the stories. Okay. Totally makes sense. And leads me to, first of all, say, that means I really failed on my first story. Cause I just uploaded that one video and I was like,


wow, they want me to share more. I don’t have any more right now. All right. What the hell? I’m just going to upload this one video. So first of all, how people find your stories if they’re not already following you, does Pinterest use hashtags? Yeah. So Pinterest uses hashtags. This is one of those controversial type things though.


Pinterest, a while ago said no hashtags. Then they said, yes, hashtags. Now they’re saying don’t use them a ton. So my philosophy has always been when they’re, when they opened up hashtags, don’t use them to keyword stuff. Use them within a sentence that you have put into the description, like use up your entire 500 character limit. And then if you have room and you can’t put on a whole,


a full another sentence in there, but there’s a hashtag or a phrase that still is relevant to what you’re sharing, then use it as a hashtag. Right. And just kind of take it that way. I’ve never done more than like three on a pin at most. So I don’t really see it being a problem. As long as you use it,


that way, those that have gone gung ho or followed the ups and downs of the hashtag or no hashtag I think are starting to not see the best results. The hashtags are still searchable, so you can still find them in search. So it really just depends on, on what placement you have for them in the description. So if your pin is about how to create a content marketing strategy,


and it’s like a download of a calendar or graphic, you’re not going to use a hashtag girl boss. I hate that hashtag by the way, every girl listening to the show is going to hate me for saying that I can’t stand that term. Yeah, no, it’s too general. Yeah. Right, right. You know what I mean? You’re going to put like content marketing or content calendar or a social media calendar or something.


Yeah. So two that don’t do the girl boss. I’m not a huge fan of that either. I like the terms that actually are like leading me somewhere. Right. Like that seems anyway. So I would say if you’re talking about content marketing though, in the description, don’t waste your hashtag on hashtag content marketing, maybe do calendar download or calendar template or something like that.


So it’s still relevant, but it’s playing off of a different type of search that someone would do. Maybe they don’t know about the content marketing calendar, but they’re looking for calendar templates or some sort of business template or something like that. That way. Then you have the conversation, it still flows. You’ve got the keywords in the description. And then you just add in a couple of those hashtags that are still keywords,


people would search for, but you couldn’t put it into the sentence flow that you were creating. All right. I got you girl. That totally makes sense. So with our stories, can you add hashtags? I kind of went back to that question. How did, how do people find my stories if they aren’t following me? Stories are still there like a collaboration of pins.


So you get to put three or five or however many you want in there and you still get a description on each one. So it’s still going to be searchable. You still can put a couple of hashtags in there if they’re not already following you and they search for something, it’s going to show up in the feed, just like any of the other static pins or video pins.


So in terms of your video, you could have uploaded it just as a pin instead of a story. And it works the same way as a static pin. You do get a little bit more tagging capability in terms of topic, tagging for videos. Then you do a static pen. So you can also use the tags for keywords that you want to be found for.


And that increases the searchability as well. Okay. So let me make sure I understood this correctly. The stories are basically a collection of pins related to the same things, is that right? Yep. So if I have a static pain, can I like Instagram? When you have something in your feed, that’s a post, can I push that to story?


Like, can I push a static pin to story or is it a separate, complete way to post that It’s a separate, complete way to post that you can repost it? The only problem that I see by doing that though is Pinterest is very heavily encouraging people to do fresh content. So they will see that same static pin posted. And then again on your stories and they’ll consider that as like a spam duper kit.


Got it. Okay. I lied that. Wasn’t the last question before. Thank you listeners for bearing with me. I hope I’m not asking like questions that you all know the answers to. I really include this in this area. And so it was, I’m so glad to have you here, Laura. And so how long the stories stay in a story?


How long are they shown for So completely different than social media? They stay on there just like a Pinterest pin, unless you go and delete them, they will be on your profile. Awesome. Okay. That makes me really happy. Nothing bothers me more than posting a really great Instagram story that people only get to see for 24 hours. So that’s super awesome.


Thank you. I’m super excited about stories. Like I said, Kelly and JC on my team really create our Pinterest content and post that. So thank you. By the way, to those of you guys who have been following us on Pinterest it’s, it’s cool to see that and those interactions and things, but I’m totally personally Pinterest illiterate. So I’ve just have so many questions that I am not able to answer for our clients.


So I’m very excited about all this. Okay. So let’s chat a little bit about video pins. Now, what is the parameter around video pins? Are they all vertical? How long can they be? And are they clickable? Yeah, so they Do not all have to be vertical. I still suggest it because then you’re taking up more real estate on the feed.


I personally don’t want to go more than a minute to a minute and a half. I believe you can go longer. I think it’s like two or three minutes that you can go up to. I’m not a hundred percent positive because I stick on the lower end. And then what was your other question? That was my other question. Oh, it’s are they clickable?


Oh yeah. So they are not clickable unless they’re used for ads. They have been clickable in the past. Again, I’m not sure if that’s something that’s changing or updating because there have been a lot of changes in the past, like four to six months on the platform, but they really do help with that growth of the account as well. When we’ve seen a lot of people come to us and say,


you know, I had a huge spike in October and now it’s December and everything’s dropping and I don’t know what to do. They post a couple video pins, they do a story pin and they’re back up again. Right. And they’re doing that consistently. I’m not going out there and telling everybody to post one and you’re going to be like woo through the roof and like,


awesome. But like, if you keep doing that, you’re going to keep seeing the results go up and back in the direction that you want them to go. Love that. Love that. Thank you so much. I have my million of Pinterest notes here and, and Laura, the couple of things. So for our listeners who want to get started with Pinterest,


I will say in full transparency, even though I’m not the one that does it, I’m really grateful for an amazing team that manages our Pinterest there. We really have seen amazing results and growth from using Pinterest as a platform with our audience. So I will say that from what I I’ll just say, if you guys are considering using Pinterest, definitely have a strategy behind it.


And really what I would like is to direct people towards some steps to get started. Nobody wants to recreate the wheel and you have a Pinterest like toolbox a toolkit it’s really cheap. It’s like 37 bucks or something that people can get started with what is inside that toolkit and what can people expect with that? Yeah, for sure. So the toolkit is really put together for anybody that needs that simple strategy,


right? That’s actually gonna help them convert on the platform. And so it’s easy. We provide different templates for them, whether they’re static, pen templates, video template, story templates. I have an awesome keyword swipe file in there too. So I’ve gone through over 700 different type of niche, specific keywords and hashtags in this swipe file. And the cool thing is,


is we constantly update that. So the swipe file for fun stats has actually brought in over $33,000 for clients and toolkit. So That’s been super fun. Yeah, That’d be good work. That’s so good. Talk about an ROI. Yeah. Tons of other stuff too. Like we have a call to action, swipe file a branding blueprint to help them really understand how to brand their pin images.


And then there’s some bonuses of course, like a custom dashboard for Google analytics and how to track and make sure you’re getting the ROI and stuff like that too. So Yeah, I mean, when we, when we got started and we started implementing what I was saying is so true, like if we had had a toolkit like this, we would have grabbed it in the second.


And so based on our listeners in our show, if you guys are thinking you want to get started with Pinterest, we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave a link to grab this toolkit in the show notes for this episode. So make sure you guys go over and grab this. I would recommend those of you guys that are listening to get started here.


It’s a low investment and it saves probably months and months of time and years of learning because you’re getting Laura’s wisdom for only $37. That’s crazy for those of you guys that are scaling your business. So for those of our listeners, you’re scaling your business. You have a team like me that you really just, you want to delegate this, you know,


you, you probably want to be on the platform. Maybe your team doesn’t know Pinterest. They aren’t experts. Then I am going to point them towards you, Laura, we’ll go ahead and make sure that we put these show notes and I would really consider like hiring Laura’s team out to manage your Pinterest for you or something like that. At least chatting with Laura on the phone.


I know she has a bunch of other stuff for you guys. So based on our listeners, I always try to give recommendations. So if you guys have ever gone through and taken our quiz to figure out what phase of business you’re in, I’m going to tell you exactly who needs to buy kind of what here, if you want to do this, if you’re in phase one or two,


then I would go with the toolkit. If you’re in phase three, four or five, then I would go with one of Laura’s other done for you services. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, go to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to get a whole rundown based on where you are of your phase of business development,


and then we’ll direct you there. But for those of our listeners, most of our faithful listeners already know what phase of, of our start to scale up system they’re in. And so they know, so phase one or two, you guys are the toolkit people three, four or five, then really done for you services near you’re ready to scale. Thank you so much.


Yay. Love everything that you shared. My, my Pinterest entrepreneur IQ, just like totally leveled up three levels. I feel like awesome. And I can’t wait to, you know, for our team to like start implementing some of the stuff that we talked about on the show as well. So super appreciate your time. Congratulations on your new baby. When this airs he’ll be here and I’m so excited for you and we’ll make sure we leave all the show notes for everybody to get their hands on these things.


I will say you guys, honestly, Pinterest has been a real nice pleasant surprise. We’re not on Tech-Talk or anything. We’re not on Twitter. And Pinterest has been really awesome and powerful for us to grow our audience. So thanks for being on this show. Yeah. I love hearing that. And I mean, honestly, it is such a great platform.


I’m so glad that your team can help you with that. That’s absolutely amazing. And thank you so much for having me. Of course. Yes, of course. Thanks for being here. I’ll talk to you soon. Thanks. Awesome. Some show. Thank you so much for tuning in and sticking with me here with Laura at the time that we recorded this,


Laura was expecting, and now she is probably listening to this episode, holding her beautiful baby girl in her arms. And so we just really appreciate Laura’s time and making sure we were able to record this episode for you guys before she gave birth and went on her maternity leave in such great information, follow us. If you aren’t yet on Pinterest, you can find us at Sweetlife podcast and you can see some of the things that our team has been doing over the last year.


You can even see how our, even our branding and our usage of Pinterest tablets has evolved how we’re using Pinterest stories and how we’re using video. We’d love to connect with you there and follow you back. All right, you guys have an awesome day. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number two.

Episode 209: How To Get Started On Clubhouse: For Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet! Follow me on Clubhouse @aprilbeach
By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers and mentors.


Clubhouse is a new social media networking opportunity for entrepreneurs. It truly takes the box it’s placed around you from other platforms and allows you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert, learn, gift, and grow. But you may just be hearing about Clubhouse or be on the app and not exactly sure how to use it. Though we are not clubhouse experts This short episode gives you the 101 on how to get started on clubhouse what to expect and great opportunities for entrepreneurs using this app. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the first three things to do when you get on Clubhouse
  2. Understand why Clubhouse is so special
  3. Start to strategize your clubhouse funnel and company growth

Resources Mentioned:

Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet!
  • By Email: www.sweetlifeco.com/clubhouse 
  • By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880
Direct Links to Join My Upcoming Clubhouse Rooms 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome to the Sweetlife life entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, and I am super excited about this episode for a couple of different reasons. First and foremost, it is our fourth podcast birthday.


So thank you so much. You’ve been tuning in for the last four years. We have dropped an episode faithfully every week. And those of you guys who’ve been longtime listeners. I mean, those are you guys around the podcast launch team. I appreciate you so much for being part of this show, making this show what it is today and sharing it with your friends.


Thank you. Thank you. Thank you. If you’re new to listening, it’s so great to meet you. This is a show where we are known for dropping some serious gems. Sometimes those that other companies and coaches charge thousands for a lot of our episodes come with bonuses that are so good. Like you can’t even believe they’re free. So cruise over to Sweetlife co.com,


click on the podcast to get all the goods. If you have never ever been there before today is a special episode. Not only because it’s our birthday. As a matter of fact, a little behind the scenes, I was going to do a real special birthday episode and you know, we’re going to do this whole shindig and it was going to be great,


but there’s something way more exciting than our fourth podcast birthday that I absolutely had to scrap the schedule. And that’s what we’re talking about today. Today, we are diving into all things, clubhouse the new clubhouse app, especially for entrepreneurs. And I’m going to share seven steps to get started on clubhouse. Before I do this, I need to have a little disclaimer here.


I am not a clubhouse expert. As a matter of fact, there’s probably somebody, many people who can speak to this way better than I’m going to do. But I have taken the time to lay out seven steps based on my experience or the last couple of weeks inside the clubhouse app, things that I have learned by following other people and just really things that I’ve gathered about being on this app.


So I’m sharing with you my experience and what I’ve learned, and guess what you know, what’s so cool about the new clubhouse app. Honestly, there aren’t any experts yet everybody is new, and that’s why I’m so excited to share today’s Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast episode so that you can get on clubhouse. You can be a drop of a big bucket that this app I believe is going to make.


So let’s go ahead and start with the fundamentals here. So, you know, whether or not you’re in the right place and you should continue hanging out and listening to this episode with me, number one, who is, is episode four, this is for, and all phases of my start to scale up system. So if you don’t know what business phase you’re in,


you can very quickly go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to receive a segmentation based on your business phase and very specific, customized recommendations to grow and scale your business to the next level. This particular episode is for entrepreneurs in all phases of my system. Just if you’re a new listener, the reason why I did note that is because some of our episodes are just based on a specific phase in business.


And I note that phase in the beginning of every single podcast episode. So frankly, you don’t waste your time. If you’re hanging out here with me, I want to make sure that this is a valuable use of your time. And so I tag every episode based on the phase of business that that episode applies to this one, however, is for all phases.


So let’s go ahead and move to the next thing, who is this episode? Great for this episode is great for entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers, and mentors. If that is you keep listening. Now let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit here. Clubhouse is a new social media networking app and opportunity for entrepreneurs. It really truly takes the box out from around you that other social media platforms have created the limitations.


The restrictions in clubhouse enables you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert. It also allows you to learn, gift other people with your knowledge and grow, but you may just be hearing about clubhouse and you’re not really sure if it’s exactly, you know, what you should be on or how to use it. And so in this short episode,


I’m going to give you the one-on-one on clubhouse, based on my experience, those experience of my colleagues and the people that I am following. So my mentors, so that you can get started on clubhouse fast and in the right way. And we’re going to also talk about actually how to get into the app as well. At the end of this episode,


you’ll know the first three things to do when you get on the app, but I’m actually giving you seven steps to actually onboard yourself onto the app. You’ll understand why clubhouse is so, so special. And you’re going to be able to start strategizing your clubhouse processes, what you’re doing on clubhouse personally. And of course professionally, because I’m a business coach and that’s what I talk about.


All right. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into the seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs.<inaudible> Okay. So welcome to call the house. We help. That basically means that I know that not everybody’s on there yet. You may be listening to this show being like, what the heck, April? This is so not fair.


I am not on this app. So here are a couple, just one. Oh, about getting on the app. First of all, currently at the recording of this, something can change literally the next hour with this app. You guys, but at the recording of this, which is only a week before the show drops, I did, this is close to the time of the show dropping as I could.


It’s only available to iOS users. Those you guys that are on Android, you’re going to have to wait a little bit longer. I have zero details on that, but I just wanted to let you know that it’s only available to iOS users. If you are an iOS user, you can go and we have it in the show notes here, you can go download the clubhouse app and let’s go ahead and dive into step number one.


The very first thing that you do even before you’re on the app is you should create and save your username. Now, here are some tips that I have seen. And from what I’m learning about your clubhouse username, unlike on some other platforms where you would take it, the name of your brand or your business clubhouse is like a real deal, real relationship app.


So it’s best to make your username, your real name, or as close as you can get to it. So that’s step number one. When you reserve your username, you’re going to be put on a waiting list to get in the app. Some people are waiting weeks, maybe even months to get into this app. And I understand that it’s frustrate.


Keep listening, hang in there with me, listen to the rest of the show. Cause I’m going to tell you exactly what, what to do. Once you get on the app, you can cut to the front of the line and we do this by getting a sponsor. That is also, what’s so cool about the clubhouse app, but you kind of have to know somebody that knows somebody to get in there.


They have to have your phone number literally saved in their phone. So you don’t just kind of know them. You actually have to really know him. So I was waived to the front of the line. My experience was I went downloaded the clubhouse app, reserved my name. I am at April beach on clubhouse. They Kevin’s my name. I was really excited about that.


And I was immediately waved in by my sponsor. Brian Fanzo you guys might know him as I social fans on Instagram brands also been a guest here on the podcast and he’s one of my mentors that helps me to increase my speaking career. And so Brian immediately got an alert that I was trying to get in the app and he waved me to the front of the line.


He endorsed me in. So what happens now on my profile, his endorsement of me is always on the bottom of my profile in my bio, which is really, really cool. And that can lead to a whole nother conversation about who you should endorse, maybe who you should not endorse on clubhouse, but that’s just my story of how I got it.


Otherwise you can be invited in and skip the wait list. When somebody, you know, on the app is a member of a group, which we’ll talk about groups and clubs are clubs on the app and they can nominate you. So those are a couple of ways that you can actually cut to the front of the line and get on the app. Otherwise just keep waiting.


You’ll get on there soon enough and believe me, it is worth the wait. So step number one is creating your username. Make it your real name. Again. This is like a real deal app. Step number two is creating your bio. There are clubhouse rooms on how to create great clubhouse bios. You are welcome. If you’re already on clubhouse,


cruise over, check out my bio at April beach, say it’s perfect. I’m not a clubhouse bio expert, but it’s been working for me to connect with the people that I really want to connect with. So you’re welcome to steal what I’ve done there. Now, overall in your bio. I want you to know that clubhouse is very, very generous.


It gives you a great deal of space in writing room to really bullet point, what you do and be very intentional about who you can help and who you want to connect with. So in your bio, you should make it really clear what you do to the problem you solve in really your intent tensions. Why are you on clubhouse? What’s your intention for being there?


You might also want to share something unique and funny, maybe a little something like behind the scenes. Like you love to ride horses or like Brian Fanzo my sponsor has that. He’s like a pager wearing millennial. I mean, that’s funny like who even wears a Pedro at all anymore. Right? And so you might want to include some of those things.


It’s in the bio. One of the things that I understand is that your bio is also searchable. And so within the app, the first few lines in your bio carry a lot of weight. So currently if you search online business strategist, I will come up as the top of that search in clubhouse. That’s because in my bio, the very first three words,


bio our online business strategist. So that’s step number two, creating your bio step. Number three of getting started on clubhouse is connecting really, really. So the first version you should connect with is your sponsor. You should follow your sponsor back, okay. This is really keeping it raw. I cut somebody right to the front of the line, who I’ve known in business for a really long time.


And this person is not following me back. It’s just a courtesy, right? So follow your sponsor back now, with that being said, you can learn a lot from your sponsor. So follow your sponsor. And there’s a little bell next year sponsors name you’re going to want to turn on. That means you get a notification whenever your sponsor is talking,


go in and listen to those rooms that your sponsor is in. Go and listen and learn and be a sponge. The first part of connecting on club house is just sitting back kind of watching the flow of how it goes. It’s a really amazing way too. Honestly, you’re dive in head first into this. It’s not even like a Cannonball. If there was like an upside down Cannonball and that’s what happens.


You just are in here. And all of a sudden you’re in these places and people are talking, it’s like a whirlwind. So just chill, just sit there and just absorb and take as long as you need to, to do that. Bet, we’re going to talk about not taking too long and jumping in right away. The next thing you want to do is when you’re listening to somebody speak,


and I’m going to share with you exactly the breakdown of how you find those places, where people are speaking here in a sec. But when you’re listening to somebody who, somebody who is speaking, when you’re in a room is what it’s called. Look to the people, to your right, and look to the people to your left. What you going to see is people literally hanging out,


standing next to you in a room, listening to somebody, speak on stage. Now this is all on an app. It’s all on a screen. So the speakers are going to be at the top of your screen. The people that the speakers follow are going to be the next section down, and then the rest of the audience is going to be underneath that clubhouse.


We’ll probably change that up in some capacity in some way, I’ve heard some thoughts of other people on that, but currently the recording of this that’s the way it is. So look at the people standing next to you on your right and your left tap on their bio. Maybe give them a follow. If it’s something that really aligns with, you know,


what you want to connect with. And then the next step is connecting off the app. Clubhouse does not have any hyperlinks, your bio, your neighbor’s bio, nobody gets hyperlinks except for there’s two places that clubhouse currently links to you. And that is Twitter and Instagram. And this is a really powerful thing I will say in my 10 days, maybe 14 days now being on clubhouse,


my Instagram following has tripled because my clubhouse account is connected to my Instagram account. And so how people connect with you is through DMS is through relationships on Twitter and Instagram, because there really isn’t a way to connect except for within talking within the rooms in the clubhouse app itself. So just so you know, that’s how you connect with people off the app.


There’s a lot of strategy behind that. As far as building funnels, can’t get into in this episode, this is just your seven steps to get started, but I’m sure your wheels are spinning. Okay. So that’s step number three. Step number four is search and find. So in clubhouse just a few days ago, they just released the ability to search by topic.


They’ve done a really good job with this. And so you can actually search and get notifications on rooms. So discussion rooms that fall under those topics here is the only downfall that I see of that. So far, the only rooms or discussions that you’ll get notified of are currently those that are hosted by clubs. We’re going to talk about clubs here in a minute.


So if you search entrepreneurship where you search parenting or you search gardening or whatever, you’re only going to get notification of the discussions under those topics that are hosted by a club, not all the rooms. So if I were to launch a room on gardening, because I don’t yet have a clubhouse club, you would never get notification of that. So just part of being part of an app,


that’s in the beta process, but you can still search by topics that you want to learn from. Also, I would recommend that you search by topics that you want to lend to. So this is getting into a little bit of business strategy. If you are an expert, if you are an expert funnel builder, or you’re a Facebook ad strategist, or you’re a graphic designer search for the rooms,


obviously in your area of expertise, so that you may be able to lend some information to the host of that room, the moderators of that room and the listeners of that room, or frankly, just so you can up your skills and be even better at what you do. And then the next tip I have for you under search and find is search for totally random rooms too.


One of the cool things about clubhouse is there are starting to be rooms on everything. I came across an amazing room. It was an 80 HD room and it’s just for people like me that have trouble focusing. And the room is hosted where they work in sprints and everybody’s sitting there in the room together and the host puts on music and then everybody goes to work for a period of time.


And then everybody together like takes a break and has their distraction moment. It’s a great way to increase productivity. So those are some cool rooms happening inside clubhouse that are totally not business-related at all. In addition to that, I will tell you if you are a faith person, if you’re a believer, there are some amazing rooms. This morning, I was in a room hosted by Myron golden business building like kingdom business building.


There’s amazing prayer rooms, Bible study rooms, really for all religions. Those are just the ones that I’m in. And so very cool things that you can search that are totally not business-related at all. Like if you need prayer and you don’t want to go to your neighbor or your sister, you can go on clubhouse and you can raise your hand and say,


will you please pray for me? I mean, how amazing, Oh my gosh. Like the power of this is just so unbelievable. Okay. Sorry. I’ll get back on track. Step number five, navigating. This is kind of just a one about how to navigate the app. The very first resource I have for you, that is a place that you should be tapping into is clubhouse guide.com.


We have put a resource to that in the link of the show notes here, please make sure you go to clubhouse guide. It’s how to get started on clubhouse clubhouse. One Oh one clubhouse best practices, a lot of the black and white and the meat and potatoes of what I’m explaining here on the show. Although I’m just sharing it with you from my personal experience so far,


that’s where I want to direct you to. That’s always going to be updated on, you know, the really the one-on-one and navigating the platform. It’s clubhouse guide.com. So let’s talk about nag navigating the platform and some of the terminology. The first thing you need to know is that there is what’s called a hallway. You have your own unique curated hallway and the hallway is showing you rooms,


discussion rooms based on the topics of interest that the app determines you may want. Now, again, what determines what you want are the topics that you follow, but also the people that you follow. So when you get on the app, you’re going to see a hallway. It’s like a list of conversations happening right now. All you have to do is tap on any of those rooms.


You’re immediately put into the audience and you can listen and see if you want to stay. When you enter a room, you’re put on mute. So you don’t have to worry about it. You can just tap on there, do the dishes, you know, drive your kids in the car or be at the gym, whatever. So the first thing you need to know is a hallway.


The second navigation point is the events tab. The events tab is in the top of the app. It looks like a little calendar, and you’re going to see a couple of different options for you. First of all, they’re suggested events for you, all events. And then the third tab is your events. And we’re going to talk about those in a minute.


So clubhouse will suggest events and scheduled rooms. Events are rooms that are, prescheduled both rooms that are prescheduled by clubs and individuals that you may want to attend. You’re also going to receive notification. So anybody you follow when they start a room, or when they’re speaking on stage in a room, if you have notifications turned on for that person, clubhouse will notify you.


And they’ll say like, Hey, so if I’m speaking in a room and you follow me, clubhouse would be like, Hey, April’s talking over here on this room on blah, blah, blah. And you can immediately tap that notification and enter the room and start chatting with me. How cool is that? Step number three is following clubs. So clubhouse enables people to create clubs.


Now we’re going to be doing many podcasts on this. I’m sure this is a very, very new app. Again, it’s in beta testing. I am not a club owner, so I can’t speak to that yet. But what I can share with you is that you can apply to have your own club. It’s going to be like the new Facebook group.


Many of you listened to this podcast, you know, how much I load Facebook groups. So I’m really looking forward to an opportunity to create community on a different platform. So just clubhouse, you can apply to start your own club. The application process currently is very backed up, but when you get approval for your club, then you can invite club members.


And when you have club members, they’re going to get notified every time your club hosts a room or an event. And so many other things, they can nominate other members to your club. I mean, it’s really an amazing way to grow your community. So one of the tips for you is if you want to start a club from what it is right now,


the way I understand is you need to host and schedule some individual rooms so that the app sees it. You’re not just like a flash in the pan that you’re really here. You’re really committed to build a longterm club with this app. You need to prove it to them. And how cool is that? It’s not like anybody can just start a group,


right? You have to be in it to give and to serve and to win it. And so you have to apply for a club and you have to prove to the app that you are worthy of being there and hosting that club on their app. Now you can follow clubs as well at the bottom of each person’s bio. If you go to the bottom of my bio,


I follow a ton of clubs. And I’m, I’m a member of really a great deal of clubs, maybe too many. Cause I got club happy and in applied, cause I was so excited just to talk to all these people. But if you go to the bottom of my app, you can see the clubs that I am a member of or that I follow.


Honestly, I’m not really sure that delineation between that. I think they’re the ones, I’m the member of in the bottom again, see, I’m learning here and you can click on that club and you can follow the club. Once you followed the club, the club hosts can have an opportunity to invite you to join the club. So you can follow a club and you can join a club.


So two different ways to connect with clubs. And then again, we talked about creating your own club, go to clubhouse guide.com for more information on creating your own club, but you’ve got to prove it, that you’re worthy of that. And you’re, you’re ready to be a leader on this app in order to get approved. For that, I promise this is going to be a quick episode and dang,


I have more to say than I thought I’m just clearly. So like a kid in a candy store, excited about this app. Number six be you. Okay. So when you join a room, if you have a question, raise your hand and ask the question, the host or the moderator will bring you to the stage. When you get on the stage currently in the app,


you are un-muted. So please, please mute yourself because you’re basically going to be disrupting the whole conversation when you get on stage and maybe they’re not ready to have you speak just yet. So be patient when you get on stage, mute yourself, listen, wait for the moderator to say, Hey so-and-so did you have a question or something that you’d like to say?


And here is a second thing. It’s okay to be nervous. It is crazy. Some of the really big influencers and leaders that I’ve seen get onto the stage for the first time and their voice is a little shaky or frankly, they’re just like, I’m nervous. And why somebody said it really well. I forget who said this, otherwise I would so credit them.


Literally. It’s very true. Somebody said, it’s not that you’re nervous to speak, but I think that we all understand the gravity of what this app could do for our relationships and our business. I think that’s where the nerves come from. It’s having an opportunity to speak to people that you would probably otherwise not have a chance to connect with. As an example,


I have been honored to be on the stage and to invite influencers to my stage, such as Myron golden and so many others. And I would never be able to connect with these leaders. Otherwise I send them an email. Obviously I can’t get a cell phone number, you know, and these are people that I highly value and I want to learn from in clubhouse.


It’s okay to be nervous when you go on the stage, just ask your question. And one of the other tips I want to leave with you is don’t ask to speak unless you have something really valuable to say, you know, those people who like raise their hand because they just want to speak because they like to hear themselves talk. Don’t be that person on clubhouse.


Seriously. If you want, if you have something genuine that you want to contribute, if the host says, Hey, does anybody want to contribute or ask a question, do it, don’t hesitate, jump up there and do it, but definitely make sure that you’re being respectful of both the hosts and the moderators and everybody in the audience time based on what you’re going to say and just don’t be that weird fan person just be respectful.


So if you are invited on a stage or if you’re in a room, you’re going to look around, you’re going to see some really big name people in this space. They’re just people too. They’re just, they’re listening and talking and sharing in the conversation. And it is absolutely a beautiful place just to be authentic, build relationships, learn, give,


grow, and create amazing networking with other companies. And then the last tip I’ll leave you with step number seven is starting your own room. Dive in, create a room. I have literally been buried in Instagram DMS about people asking me questions about clubhouse or companies who want to work with me based on the rooms that I’ve hosted. And now what they know my area of specialty is from clubhouse.


Literally my calendar is totally full. Okay. That is because I dove in and I started a room. I didn’t know what I was doing. And I was like, Hey, you know what? This is my first room I started. It was about the podcast episode of the week. I was like, okay, Hey, cool. I already know that I’m talking about this on the podcast this week.


How cool would it be to start a room? That’s a conversation about the podcast. And so I started a room and it was just talking about five areas of focus for the upcoming year in your business. And that room grew and grew and grew and grew. And I invited people to the stage and I made people moderators with me. And there’s other strategies behind that and why I did that.


We can talk about it another episode. But the reality is, is that just start a room. You know, I was speaking to somebody of course, again and Instagram DMS, and she is starting a business in an area where, you know, she just needs to do a lot more market research. And so I suggested to her, start a room,


asking a question, asking, are there any XYZ experts out there or are there any people with this experience out there, come join my room and let’s talk about it. So she didn’t even have to be the expert of that room just because you hosted doesn’t mean you’re the expert, a great colleague of mine, Heather and Haven would we host a lot of rooms together.


Now started a room a week ago, week and a half ago on how to monetize virtual events. Very simply because she wanted to know how and that room grew to the largest room. We have coasted on clubhouse so far with amazing virtual event and speaking influencers coming to our stage. The whole experience frankly, is blowing my mind. As you can probably hear in my recording of this show.


So you don’t even have to be an expert. Just ask a question. You might say, Hey, does somebody want to co-work with me right now? Hey, is anybody else having trouble potty training their kid? I mean, it can be about anything. Dive in, start a room, get started on this app, building authentic relationships. Okay.


So I don’t think I was succinct as I wanted to be. I apologize for that. Let me recap. The seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs. Number one, go get your username. Hopefully you won’t have to wait too long to get in. Number two, create your bio number three. Connect that’s following your sponsors and intentionally connecting with people and making other networking connections on the app.


Number four, search and find the right topics, the right rooms, and totally random rooms. Just to see how they’re doing things. Number five, navigate the hallway. So make sure that you know how to tap into rooms, how to leave rooms quietly in how to follow clubs, be part of clubs and get more of the topics that you’re interested in listening to in your hallway.


Number six, be you. It’s cool. Just be you. You can show up in your pajamas. Nobody cares be you and number seven, dive on in. Okay. So in the show notes of this episode, which you can find by visiting sweet life podcast.com forward slash two zero nine, I have a ton of links for you. You are going to find obviously the link to download the clubhouse app.


You’re going to find the link to clubhouse guide.com and you are also going to get an opportunity to get notifications from me. Now, clubhouse gives a lot of notifications, so we kind of to create a work around for this. So if you want to know, when I’m chatting in a room, join me in a room to chat. And then all of the other amazing entrepreneurs that I moderate and cohost rooms with,


you can very simply go to sweet life co.com forward slash flub house. Let me say that again. Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. If you are not on clubhouse, go there. And I send a periodic notes about the rooms that we are in highlights from rooms, in other things that we have seen and experienced just being in this app in the early phases.


So if you want updates, room notes, highlights, amazing quotes. I have about 20 pages of just blow your mind quotes. And then you can get those things by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse, or you can text them word clubhouse to the number (805) 254-0880. All of those things are in the show notes. Also in the show notes, I have provided direct links to join my upcoming rooms.


So if you’re already on clubhouse, you can go to the show notes for this episode and you can click on the direct link to join my show. I hosted a show, not a show room. And so used to saying show with podcasts. I host weekly room every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And they are business strategy sessions for entrepreneurs.


Very similar to the things we talk about here on the podcast, but you and I get to talk about about it and I get to help you and help you strategize and answer your immediate questions about the topics January 13th. If you’re listening to this show live, I am. Co-hosting a room on license in your content. So how to scale your business by licensing your content.


I’m co-hosting that room with a few different, amazing attorneys that are copyright attorneys, IP attorneys definitely join that room. If you’re thinking about scaling your business by licensing your content courses and other strategies, or frankly, you’re just wondering about it, January 20th, I’m hosting how to grow your six figure coaching business with podcast and PR and January 27th. I am hosting a room on how to create your methodology,


your process, and turn it into your signature offer. Those are all on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock Eastern time. I would love to chat with you in any of my rooms and literally there’s so many other awesome rooms. I can’t wait for you to jump in and join this app when you do make sure you follow me at April beach. And if you aren’t yet,


you can DM me on Instagram. I am at April beach life on Instagram, and I will send you a link, a direct link from IgG on how to get all hard clubhouse, insider notes, and links to join me in all these rooms. Ooh, as longer than I thought it was going to be so much for hanging out with me guys,


I got to get back to clubhouse. Yep. That’s pretty much what it’s like. I’m hosting a room tonight, a female entrepreneurs round table, and so excited to jump in and learn from some of these amazing men and women leaders. And I can’t wait to talk to you in there too. Again, the direct show notes for this episode can be found@sweetlife.com


Forward slash two zero nine. All right. Talk to you guys soon.

Episode 208: How Be A Peak Performer In Health, Wealth, and Relationships in 2021 – with Eric Partaker

208 Eric Partaker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

The 3 Alarms, Free Digital Book and Training

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and leaders in all phases of business who feel like you just can’t catch up, and you know there’s a better way to live. Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz


To kick off the new year, I’ve brought Peak Performance Coach, Eric Partaker, on the show to help you get started on the right foot and make 2021 the year you become the most productive version of yourself in multiple areas of your life and business. Eric has worked with and led high-performing teams at McKinsey & Company, Skype, and Chilango. He is one of 300 people worldwide certified as a High Performance Coach, by the High Performance Institute. Over the last 20 years he has studied and modeled the traits and habits of the world’s most successful people, in order to help his teams and clients break through their barriers and reach their highest potential, in both their work and life.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. No longer waste time
  2. Have a strategy to root your identity in who you want to be (even before you get there)
  3. Stop being an amateur and become a pro

Resources Mentioned:

Email Eric Partaker | eric@ericpartaker.com

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to 2021. The first show, and we are starting out with a major bang that is going to be a game-changer for you. I’m so excited to dive in and help you understand how to be a peak performer in your health,


wealth, and relationships this year and beyond with our guest expert, Eric partaker. So let’s chat about what we’re doing here and why this show is so special. You know, as entrepreneurs, as leaders, as human beings, we all want to operate at our highest level. We all want to be that person that we envisioned we would be right. But what happens is we get burned out.


We get stretched thin, and there are some things that just don’t balance out to equal the vision that you might’ve had for what you wanted your life and your company to look like. And so we’re going to dive into that and we’re going to start out with a powerful plan and strategies to really be a peak performer in your health, your wealth and your relationships in 2021.


And let me just tell you, this is not another piece of content or some other podcasts on how to become productive or how to set goals. No, no, no. Our guests today shared strategies that I have never ever heard before. These aren’t the same old, same old things. These things are game changers. You guys, if you watch our video episode of this,


it is totally me behind the scenes taking massive notes. The things that he was saying was just gold. And so this is an episode that is definitely not to miss for those of you that really want to operate at your highest level in 2021. And, and frankly take back control of your health, wealth, and relationships, which are all things that we have left behind struggling with this last year.


We all hope and pray. So let’s talk about, you know, really what you can expect out of this episode. In this episode, we’re talking with Eric and I’m going to give you a bio on him. This guy is super duper awesome. So we’re talking with Eric, who’s a peak performance coach and author of the bestselling book, the three alarms,


a simple system to transform your health, wealth, and relationships forever. And the information on this show, like I said, it’s not going to be the same old, same old. You’re going to discover powerful new ways to increase your productivity, deep root your identity in who you’re supposed to be. And you’re also going to understand how to become even stronger with each challenge that comes your way.


It’s really, really good stuff. You guys. So at the end of this episode, if you apply the strategies in here and the bonus, that’s going to be given to you here with this show, you’ll no longer waste time. You’ll have a, to root your identity and who you want to be, even if you’re not that person yet. And you’ll stop being an amateur and become a pro.


Now let’s introduce you to Eric partaker. Eric’s a CEO coach and mentor, author, and peak performance expert. He was named the CEO of the year in 2019 business excellence awards. One of the top 30 entrepreneurs in UK 35 and under by startups magazine and among Britain’s most disruptive entrepreneurs by the Telegraph, he’s advised fortune 50 CEOs while at McKinsey helped build Skype’s multi-billion dollar success story and has founded several businesses of his own.


He’s a certified peak performance coach and has also completed a coaching certification and apprenticeship with professor BJ Fogg who leads Stanford university’s behavior design lab told you this guys it’s just super rockstar. He continues research evidence-based studies in psychology, neuroscience, habit, change leadership and peak performance. And he is giving you a totally free digital copy of his book. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com.


This is episode number 208, and a link to download his book will be found in the show notes. So if you are really ready to make a change that is going to stick and your business and your work and your relationships so good. You guys let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Alrighty. You guys, I’m so happy to be joined by Eric partaker here today,


and we’re talking to all about peak performance, peak performance, usually in the past, have you been listening to the show for a long time? We talk about peak performance with extreme and adventure sports. And as that relates to the company you’re building basically. So you can have more time to take off and play with your extreme inexpensive venture sports. But today we’re really talking about peak performance that comes before that something that is not discussed often enough in the entrepreneur space.


And that’s about really performing at your highest level all the way across the board, so that you have an opportunity to reap all those benefits and rewards. And Eric is in the house today, talking all about his new book and how you guys can get to this state of becoming a peak performer and doing this in your business. You can do it in your life.


Eric. Welcome. Thank you so much for taking the time to join us here on the Sweetlife podcast. Super glad to have you tell everybody a little bit about yourself. Yeah, thanks April. And thanks everyone for taking the time to listen. Yeah, I’ve, I’ve been obsessed with peak performance for over two decades, but well, first, definitely in the wrong way.


And then in a, in a much better way. So about 10 years ago, it was all, you know, work. It was hustle mentality, and that’s how I was for the whole first half of my career. You know, so a hundred plus hour work weeks at McKinsey and company and helping build up Skype before we sold it to eBay,


few of my own businesses. And you know, I’m on a plane. Start to feel unwell, Dr. On-board rushes over, takes my vital signs and says, we need to land the plane immediately. I think he’s having a heart attack 10 years ago, playing emergency lens, where to a small town in France, the runway shut down. They take me off into a waiting ambulance where they administer nitrates to open up the arteries and increase the blood flow to the heart.


And as the ambulance sped off to the local hospital, I looked up to the eyes of the French paramedic looking down at me and I said, please don’t let me die. I have a five-year-old son. I didn’t say, please don’t let me die. I need to clear my inbox. And you know, my point there is that as entrepreneurs we’re so into the hustle,


we’re so into, you know, what, what do we got to do next? And, and it can all go at any moment at any time. And what I said in that moment, it really truly changed my life because the next morning I woke up and I thought, you know, all of my success to date at that point had come at the price of my health and relationships.


I almost lost my life. And then the very first words out of my mouth had nothing to do even with my own life. But, you know, with my boy at the time, right, my two boys now, but at the time, my, my only son and then that just struck me as, okay, that’s the three legged stool.


That’s what peak performance means. You know, we need to perform at a peak level across our health, our wealth, our work as a wealth driver and our relationships. And when I say peak performance, I’m not meaning turning. Yeah, I don’t, I don’t mean like in a turn a person into a Ferrari, you know, I mean, close the gap between your current and best self across all the areas of life that matter most,


you know, on the health, you know, work and home front. That’s the mission that I’m on now that I’ve been on for the last 10 years. And my book, the three alarms is, is about that mission. And it’s about how I’ve, codafide it as if you want to reach your best on the health, wealth and relationship fronts,


you need to do it through IPA, like the beer, but better for you and the IPA standing for identity productivity and antifragility. Yeah. And thank you so much for sharing your story. You guys watch the videos of these, you know, any sort of story like that. I’m here, like tearing up behind the scenes, but I understand that there are so many people that are on their way to hit that point without what you’re talking about in this book and,


you know, praise God, you were able to come back and figure it out and, you know, share it with the rest of us and really be able to leverage this to the next level and come in here and step in and help entrepreneurs. And so this is a perfect episode before we were recording. I was thinking, I wonder, are we going to air this?


And this is a perfect one to kick off 2021, because some of the things that you’re talking about, you know, we all want 20, 21 to be different than 2020. And it wouldn’t be nice if we just woke up and the whole entire world that was glittering on January 1st and everything was perfect again. And, and, and it’s okay to want those things.


But what we know is that we need to have a plan regardless of what comes about. And that’s what you talk about here in your book. And I love that now you have worked with really high level executives and entrepreneurs and your work in the past and getting people results in this. And it has really been extraordinary. And so I’m super excited to dig into what we’re talking about on today’s show.


So you say how to become a peak performer with IPA identity productivity, and antifragility, let’s go ahead. Can you dive in a little bit, and let’s kind of dissect each one of these things. So our listeners have an idea of some immediate actions and some areas in their life that they can, you know, rebalance or correct, or take a look at and,


and make some adjustments. Can we dive into IPA and the identity first? Yeah, let’s do it all. Talk about each and a practical tool. And the book of, I give loads of practical tools, but we just give like one quick win takeaway for each, each section. And let’s go ahead and say this too. If I can just interrupt.


You also said, all of our listeners are going to get a free digital copy of your book and we will make sure that is a huge gift you guys, and we’ll make sure that the link to that is in the show notes for this show@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero eight. So yeah. So let’s go ahead and dive in. Yeah. Cool. And,


and I just want to step back just super quickly once again, and say, you know, 20, 20, it was a challenging year. And part of what I’m trying to do with getting the message out around this book is to have it perfectly timed with making 20, 21, a rebound year making 20, 21 the year where you stepped back up to the plate,


right? Where you take things back up a level and you kind of dust things off and you say, all right, let’s go again. And IPA is the path forward. And, and one other thing to remember, my definition of peak performance is not turning you into a Ferrari. None of this is about achieving perfection. This is just about you showing up as your best self in the areas of life that matter most.


This is about you kind of gaining entry to what Abraham Maslow estimated was the 2% of people in the world who realize their full potential. So IPA for me is about gaining entry to that 2% club. So identity, identity, why don’t we start with identity? So the why here is because we cannot become a better version of ourselves now and going forward,


if we continue to be the person that we’ve always been, that doesn’t line up. So what got you here? Won’t get you there. You need to make a change. And entrepreneurs leaders, CEOs are very intentional when it comes to work, they get it. They know that I need to have envisioned. I need to model myself after that vision,


but they don’t bring that same intentionality often to their health and home, or you know, their, their health and relationships. So what I talk about in the book, the three alarms is how I decided, okay, what is the best version of me look like on each of those fronts? And that’s what I’d like everyone listening to do right now.


Just ha have a thing. If you were to give the best version of you, you at your best, a name on the health front, what would it be if you were to give the best version of you, a name or a phrase or a persona on the work front, what would it be? And if you were to do the same on the relationship or the home front,


what would it be? So I gave an example of what I’ve done with myself. So on the health front, it’s not me who goes to the gym in the morning, I’m a world fitness champion. That’s who goes to the gym in the morning. That’s the person who walks through the door. And when I’m in on, in a particular exercise and I get to the eighth rep,


and I’m not sure if I’m going to get to the 10th, a little voice goes off in my head and says, of course you will, because you’re a world fitness champion. And that’s all being driven by identity because behavior follows identity. When I take a Spider-Man costume and I put it on my seven-year-old Leo, I do not need to teach Leo what to do next.


He doesn’t need to go through Spider-Man training camp. I put the Spider-Man costume on and he starts shooting webs from his wrist, jumping around, making funny noises. Right? So what it really, all I’m trying to do here is to get everyone listening to, you know, remember that you’ve already done this. You did it as a kid. You picked an identity,


maybe when you were playing, you changed into that and it changed your behavior. Same concept. You’re just remembering back to something you used to do. Every time I go to the gym now I’m wonder woman, perfect world fitness champion. Now I have that on my phone as an alarm at 6:30 AM, I’ve changed the name of the alarm. And it says world fitness champion to prompt that intentionality.


Okay, because I’ve segmented my day into three parts and I’ve chosen basically a best self identity that will power each of the segments. And so 6:30 AM world fitness champion goes off. The next alarm on my phone goes off at 9:00 AM and it says, world’s best coach, am I the world’s best at all of these things? Of course not. But that’s the version of me.


That’s going to start the Workday. How does that version of me show up and behave in the world? You know, how decisive inspiring and reliable will I be for my clients? If I’m coming from the vantage point of the world’s best coach versus just Eric and at 6:30 PM, the game-changing alarm for me, we’re all different for me. This is a game changer.


It goes off and it says world’s best husband and father to prompt the, how would the world’s best husband and father walked through that door right now? That’s the power of intentionality, right? So I’ve chosen, what does best look like on the three areas of life that matter? Most, I queue it at a particular time of day, that would most benefit from being powered by that best self identity.


And I get three massive benefits. It brings intentionality into the day. It brings wise counsel, you know, into a moment, you know, okay, what should I say in response to this person? What should I do next? Well, what would the world’s best husband and father do? And number three, it prompts, reflection, because if I do lose my cool with my seven year old,


for example, I’m not perfect then because I had something so high to measure against, I feel like a real jerk afterwards. Right. And that’s good because that’s making the gap painfully obvious and it means that I get better and better at closing it. So that’s the identity piece I’m taking course millions of notes here. I’ve already named all of my different sections of my day and who I am.


So I just I’m appreciating this and eating it up. I’m a sponge here, loving this information. I love that identity too. And it’s so true. Like when along the lines did we forget who we believe that we are rather than, you know, what the world tells us. And so, and I, and I love that. And you’re so right about the fact that as entrepreneurs,


we are so apt to believe that before in our business, but maybe not so much in our health and our personal lives, those things for sure are not the same. Maybe it’s because money doesn’t drive it. And it’s not because they aren’t as important to us. Well, maybe the health at first, you know, so I think this is super awesome.


Loving this so far. So let’s talk about productivity, the identities, EEI, and in IPA, what do you do and what do you recommend as far as productivity and how does that, why did you choose productivity as part of your methodology for obtaining people? Yeah. Great question. So, okay. So context then, you know, setting. So first we start with,


well, who is it that we want to be? That’s the identity piece. So now we’re operating from the vantage point of our best self and the three areas of life that matter most. So what do we do now to make progress? Because we’re just awesome, but we’re standing still, right? And we need to progress. We need to climb the mountain now.


Right? And so we do that through action. So that’s why we talk about productivity because knowledge isn’t power anymore. These days I can Google anything and be knowledgeable about it. Within seconds. Knowledge is not where the game is played. It’s about taking consistent persistent deliberate action. That’s where the game is played. And that’s why we need to optimize ourselves for productivity,


because we don’t want to just be taking any action. We want to take the right action and most efficiently, so smart. So there’s loads I go into in the book and productivity. I actually, it’s a big thing that, although the IPA acronym is it’s only three letters I had to do productivity planning and productivity execution, because it’s about, you know,


plan, execute, plan execute. Right. Right. And I think before you go into it, you’re an expert in this. Did you realize that I know a lot of entrepreneurs that have the best laid plans, but then zero ability to execute. Is that why in your experience of dealing this, you know, entrepreneurs, we can think of these,


Oh, this is going to be the plan. We can even set the plan, lay the plan out the steps of the plan, reverse engineer, the plan, Gantt chart, the plan, whatever it is, but then actually doing it tends to be a lot harder. So is that because we all struggle in this? Yeah. Yeah. Well,


I was a chronic over planner. I would just plan, plan, plan, plan, plan. The other thing though, too, that I noticed with myself was that I was also a world-class procrastinator and may have something to do with the entrepreneurial mindset because of our tendency to dream and to, you know, think about, you know, big opportunities and the next big thing,


it’s almost like this, you know, proneness for distraction, right. Or at least it was for me. And so I had to transform myself from a chronic procrastinator to a super producer. And, you know, we won’t have time to go into all the productivity tools, but I want to drive home. One in particular that I think is mind blowing.


So the average person loses and this, this data, I first picked up, by the way from the book, the one thing, the average person under observation loses 28% of their Workday to multitasking and effectiveness. So the person thinks that they’re multitasking in an efficient way, but what they’re really doing is they’re doing what’s called task switching, going from one thing to the next,


very, very rapidly. And that leads to a 28% loss in the day, because rather than sticking with one thing, they’re jumping around. So when they get back to the thing that they originally intended to work on, they’ve lost their place. They have to retrace their steps at the regain, their momentum, all of this leads to lost time, 28% loss of a day.


Now the book just leaves the stat right there. And I thought, hang on a second. This is like not doing that stat justice. So I took that number and I said, well, let’s generously take off six weeks for vacation in a year. So let’s do 28% loss against 46 work weeks. That means that the average person is losing 13 weeks a year,


which is an entire calendar quarter. So of course you don’t feel productive. Of course you don’t feel like there’s not enough time for everything you’ve lost a whole quarter every year Because you aren’t productive. And because you would have lost all that time. I mean, you’re playing a game of basketball and you’re going against the competition. You get to the end of the third quarter and then news to you.


Somebody says, Oh, by the way, we’ve got to tell you, but you and the rest of your team had to sit out the fourth quarter. You’re like, huh. And you’re like, well, how do we even have a chance of winning then? And they’re like, Oh we don’t. Yeah. It’s. So if we extrapolate that across a 40 year career,


that means that the average person loses an entire decade. What could you do with an extra decade? That’s like two more careers potentially. Wow. So what’s the problem here? The problem is people just jumping around too much throughout the day that in their phone disturbed their, their focus and the concentration, having too many browser tabs, open notifications coming in left,


right and center all of these lures to kind of guide us off our path for peak performance, our path for realizing our full potential that’s the issue. And so what we have to combat all of that with is developing the power of single tasking, which is a bit of a lost art, especially nowadays with smartphones angle tasking is nothing more than making sure you stick with what you’re working on for a good chunk of time.


At least 30 minutes provided there’s 30 minutes of work to do. I like to shoot for, you know, 30 minute chunks throughout my day. And then I take a break after 30 minutes. And the way you can develop the habit of single tasking is by becoming a lawyer for a few weeks. And what I mean, what I read is that lawyers timesheet their days because otherwise they don’t know where to assign the client time.


And when I thought about that, I thought, well, if a lawyer can do this every single day as part of their career, then I could certainly should be able to manage it for like, you know, few weeks. So all I did was I had four columns activity start time, end time, total minutes. And I literally recorded every single task I did from the time I woke up to the time I went to bed kind of before and after work,


I was more like grouping stuff together. You know, it’s like getting ready for example. But once I started the Workday, it was everything. So working on presentation nine to nine, 13, nine, 13 to nine 17, LinkedIn nine and 17 to nine 20, you know, Google search nine 20 to nine 23, reheated coffee and check Twitter.


And the alarming thing that it revealed was just how much task switching was going on. On the first day that I did this, I had 77 entries in my Workday. Wow. As I was bouncing around unknowingly from one thing to the next. So when you do this, it does two things. One, it raises an unprecedented level of awareness in you in terms of where is my time actually going and how often,


you know, am I switching and bouncing around? And then two, it starts to become kind of painful when you have two for the third time, for example, on a day, right. Facebook 20. Right, Right, right. It’s really eye-opening. And I could see how that would be incredibly. Eye-opening really, really fast. And gosh,


I mean, I just think that there is so much last time, by the way, the one thing is one of my favorite books of all time. And we’ll make sure that the notes to that book as well are in the show notes for this show. And I think that one of the things that you’re saying here was really, really interesting, the art of single tasking.


So when we single task and chunk our time and block calendar, a block and tackle and do those things, how fast and how much more of an increased you see in productivity in your clients that you have do that. I mean, is that like instant results that they’re seeing when they actually change these are, what are your case studies working with clients who have,


who’ve really tried to apply this. Yeah, that’s a great question. So we’re not machines, we’re not robots. And so what that means is that we can’t actually reclaim the entire 28% and then that may lead you to believe that, okay. So then I can’t actually get the full quarter back. That’s actually not true because when you start to develop your ability to focus,


it also speeds up your output for the 72%. That wasn’t an issue anyway. Right. So what I see is, well, beyond then the 28% capture, it’s almost like people are becoming twice as productive as they previously were and that’s life changing, right? Because you’re producing more with the time you have. And that suddenly gives you the time that you are yearning for when it comes to your health and your relationships.


And yeah, it’s been life-changing for me to personally, because I just work, you know, with an extreme sense of focus I’m intensely on and then intensely off. And there’s no real anxiety during my Workday. There’s so much to be said to this. Like you were saying, I mean, it’s, you guys are just going to be super excited when you get a chance to experience Eric’s book with that being said again,


there’s so many things we could talk about, but moving on to the anti-fragility, let’s talk about that and why that is so important. We were talking about it a little bit behind the scenes before we started recording. What exactly is that to our listeners who are just wondering, I don’t even know how to define that necessarily in my life. Yeah. Okay.


So let’s play a game. Let’s say that you are a shipping container, you know, and my question would be, well, what does the container or the crate, you know, say on the side, if you’re that crate, what’s your label, is it fragile? And then that means you get hit a couple of times you break. And then my question to you would be,


well, what’s the opposite of being fragile. And then you’ll say probably something like robust, you know, or strong, robust, and strong synonyms, you know? So that just means that, okay, I can kick you a few more times and eventually you break and then you might say, no, no, no, no, no, no,


no, no, no. I’m resilient. Okay. Well, by definition, that means that we can keep hitting you and you’ll absorb the shock and you’ll stay the same. It’s like, Oh, okay, well that’s pretty good. Enter antifragile. The more we kick you, the stronger the crate becomes, wow. That’s where we want to be.


Now people, when they first hear this say, okay, wishful thinking, that’s like, you know something in a Marvel movie, that’s, that’s not reality, but then you’re dead wrong because every single person, your body is a perfect temple for anti-fragility. You stress a muscle and it causes it to grow. You expose the body to germs and bacteria.


It builds the immune system. You expose tissues to, you know, small doses of, you know, ultra by light. And it actually generates vitamin D you’re already, anti-fragile physiologically your body’s already doing it without you even realizing it. So it’s hard coded in your DNA. You just need to get what’s happening in your body, up into your head.


And so anti-fragility is about realizing that the gym, where you go and you train doesn’t need to just be there in the gym. You can turn life into one massive training camp. So every moment of adversity, challenge, frustration, disappointment thing, that doesn’t go your way. It’s nothing more than a personal trainer in the gym of life, walking up to you and saying,


Hey, here’s a Dumbo. Do you want to curl it? And you can either grab the dumbbell, curl it, complete the repetition and grow stronger as a result. Or you can wimp out and walk out of the gym. So it’s up to you. And the antifragile mentality says, yeah, I’ll take that dumbbell. Yeah. And if you’re in an argument with somebody,


for example, and now they escalate the argument, all that’s happening there is that they’re saying here here’s a heavier Dumbo and you could walk away or you could stay there and you can curl it with your best self. So loads of different ways of building this mentally, you know, anti-fragility, you know, that I cover in the book, but probably the most powerful,


I mean, there’s so I have so many favorites, so hard to choose. Okay, I’ll go with this one. If you can embrace this, just this, if you forget everything else I’ve just said, and if you just embrace this one thing, even if you forget to pick up the free digital copy of the book, that’s fine, but just don’t miss this point.


And that’s in 2021. Do you want to remain amateur in life or do you want to turn pro let’s start with an amateur. So the first half of my career, I let an amateur existence by that I made feeling for me, preceded action. I needed feel like doing things in order to do them. So feeling generated action. That’s how an amateur lives their life.


And the amateur will get amateur. Results a pro knows that it’s action that generates feeling the equation is literally flipped, which means they don’t need to feel like doing something in order to take action. They take action, whether they feel like it or not. And in fact, when you really upgrade this kind of way of being or mentality, the less you feel like doing something,


the more discomfort it presents you, the more you step into it, the more you say it’s there for in that direction. I must step, you know, it’s sorta like elite warriors are trained to run towards the sound of gunfire, not a way. Right? And so turning pro versus remaining an amateur, what do you want 20, 21 to be?


And where have you been an amateur in life? And where can you develop a professional mentality and know that action generates feelings, not the other way around. Wow. Eric, I’ve never heard it explained as well as you just explained that there, thank you so much. I mean, that was just, I mean, the anti-fragility part in one of the things you said,


let me look back at my notes here. So I have it, is that the resilience you bounce off and stay the same. And so many you hear that talked about so often like, Oh my gosh, well, you need to be resilient and just bounce around and just pop off this. But what we’re talking about is, yeah, resilience keeps you exactly where you were before you don’t go forward.


You don’t go backwards. You just bounce off and you remain the same in the way that you’ve just explained that with actually changing with actually becoming stronger from each one of the blows, the pushes, the drops, whatever it is super amazing. And I love everything that you said, and I know our listeners are just really going to get a ton out of this.


Not only that that’s so generous of you to give away a digital copy of your book and for your time here on the show, this is the perfect show. So Jeff Goins introduced us. Thank you, Jeff, for bringing Eric here on the show. Jeff was a guest on the show. Oh my gosh. Like almost four years ago now in the very beginning,


when we first launched and he was right on about you being perfect for our audience and your message that you wanted to share. And I’m so glad that you’re here and this is exactly what we were looking for for honestly, for me personally, to kick off 2021, you know, we have guests on the show. I learned so much from you and really wanting to find somebody that was saying exactly what I selfishly personally needed to hear right now is an entrepreneur and a mother and a leader.


And what I would consider was a peak performer up until 2020. And now I just feel like I have been resilient and I have not necessarily gotten stronger through this. And so I will look at myself very, very closely after today’s episode. And I’m super excited to dive in more to the work that you’re doing and really appreciate your time on this show.


And so tell everybody how they find you. I’m really into reading print copies. I love holding a book in my hands, how they can experience your work, where you hang out when you are being incredibly focused and hanging out online, not all the time and how they can work with you when they’re ready to really take their business and their life to the next level.


Yeah. I just have to say April that, you know, when you say, wow, I really needed this personally. Hey, me too. You know, the reason that I’ve done all of this is not because I wasn’t born thinking this way. I had to become an expert about all this stuff because I really needed it. I needed to become anti-fragile.


I needed to become more productive. I needed to start living more intentionally. So we’re all on the same boat on that. So I just wanted to say that. So, okay. The book, if you like print copies of the book, please head over to Amazon, amazon.com, amazon.co.uk. I’m based here in the, in London, in the United Kingdom,


but either Amazon will have the book. If you head over to my website at Erik, Erik with a C Eric partaker, just like it sounds partaker.com got a free digital copy of the book waiting for you there. And I have some free three-part video training with worksheets as well, waiting for you there that will help you further embed some of the concepts in the book I’m coming out with an entire video course that I’m filming actually this week,


like over 40 different modules, all about IPA, which will be available on the website by the time this airs. And then if you’re listening and you’re like, look, I think I benefit from even just a chat, a single kind of peak performance insight session, which, which I run, you know, on a free basis with people, or if you’re like,


I need a coach or any of that, then just get in touch via the website. And, you know, we can have a chat, basically. I’m looking after, at the moment, 24 CEOs, entrepreneurs, other coaches, and they’re running everything from billion dollar businesses down to pre-revenue, you know, they’re just getting their funds raised to start their business,


but they all share the same quest. They want to close the gap between their current and best self. They want to reach their full potential and they want to do it. Multidimensionally and then, you know, my email, Eric, Eric partaker.com. So there you go, Thank you so much and we’ll make sure all those links are in the show notes.


And thank you so much for your time. I am super stoked to kick off 2021 with you, Eric and great to be connected with you. Thank you.<inaudible> Right. And that is a wrap for episode number 208 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. You can find all of the show notes and the digital copy of the book that Eric’s promised you here on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife co.com


simply click on podcast. And this is episode number 208. And for those of you guys that are really ready to kick off this year with a bang, make sure to join us for commitment week 2021. It is coming up on January the 11th, totally free to join, and we are going to be covering five different aspects to reset and refocus your business for 2021.


It’ll take less than seven minutes a day. You guys it’s insane. We’ll go ahead and leave the link to join commitment week 2021, as well as the link to download Eric’s book in the show notes, or you can also just simply join commitment week by visiting Sweetlife coat.com forward slash commitment dash week dash 2021. Right? You guys be awesome. Can’t wait to talk to you next week.


Bye bye. For now

Episode 206: 3 Tips To Put Family First As An Entrepreneur & Create More Time Freedom – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 


Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
  2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
  3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,


we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.


So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.


You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,


with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,


but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,


that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,


I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.


And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,


as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,


which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,


cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,


we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.


First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,


that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?


Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,


what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,


because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,


okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.


It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?


Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.


Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.


So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.


And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,


it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?


Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,


you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,


okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.


And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,


like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,


you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.


Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.


We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.


And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,


who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.


Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.


And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,


that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,


but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.


This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,


which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.


And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.


They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,


okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.


And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.


And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,


you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,


to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,


why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,


you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.


We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,


I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.


I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,


including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

Episode 203: How To Create Your 2021 Online Business and Lifestyle Plan – April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my Start To Scale Up System™ – take the quiz here to find out and receive a personalized business growth plan.


Whether you’re heading to a family reunion are planning to hike the John Muir Trail, Lifestyle freedom is the reason why you became an entrepreneur. Let’s make sure you’re planning your year in advance to actually make it happen. For the past three years I’ve recorded an episode every December to teach how I lay out my year for family and travel first, while assuring I’ve reached the profit benchmarks I need to to make it all happen. In this episode I lay out those steps to make sure my year it’s exactly the way I want it to be. (Regardless of what craziness comes in the year to come, creating a plan is essential to ever getting what you want.)

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Know how to layout the whole year for lifestyle freedom
  2. Be able to assess what changes may need to happen in your offers and services to reach your lifestyle goals
  3. Have the most important math equation that business coaches don’t tell you – and if you don’t know these numbers – you’re sunk

Resources Mentioned:

Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys. It’s so great to talk to you again. This is Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. So number 203, and I’m April beach, your host here at the show and at the recording of this,


we are turning over into the month of December. I’m so excited. I know you’re with me. Let’s have jazz hands here. We’re ready to put this year behind us. And in the process of doing that, it’s time to plan for 2021. So this episode is a really cool episode. It’s actually a great show. I have recorded this show and released it in December for the last three years in a row.


And today we’re talking all about the steps to plan this next upcoming year for profit and lifestyle freedom. And so this is a great show for those of you guys that are wondering how to plan out your business plan for the upcoming year. But also you share the same values as me, where as you want to make sure you’re setting aside time to be with your family,


to travel to your kid’s soccer, things that they’re going to do to go visit your family reunion at the Lake, whatever it is that you want to do, that you have a vision that you want to do, that you can do for the upcoming year. And the truth of the matter is, is if we don’t plan your business for this in advance,


it’s never going to happen, never, ever, ever going to happen. And regardless of any global pandemic or anything else that comes around or where we are as a world, as the new year rolls around, you have to have a plan or it’s never going to happen. So that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. And you know, people ask me all the time,


how I’m able to run two companies, have a busy podcast and still be able to travel with my kids. So in 2019, I was away from the house for almost six months for the whole year, traveling and living in different places. And this is how I did it. So even though this year, didn’t roll out the way all of us wanted.


I’m still going to teach you how to plan for it for the years to come. And in this show, this is what you can expect. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom. And I’m going to give you the steps, almost the order of operations in which I go through this every single year.


You’re also going to be able to assess what changes you need to make to your current offers. That’s actually going to make that happen. This shows can help you open up your eyes in a very sobering way. I’ll be honest regarding what you’re selling and whether or not what you have in your menu of offers and services and programs is honestly ever going to get you to the lifestyle that you want.


And we’re going to do that by making sure you have the most important math equation. I hate math too. I’ll be honest, but there are some pretty important math equations that most business coaches don’t tell you that I need to make sure that you’re aware of. Because if you don’t know these numbers, if you don’t hit these numbers, you’re never going to have lifestyle freedom.


And so we’re going to dive into all of those things on today’s show. Again, this is Sweetlife podcast episode number 203. So you can cruise over to Sweetlife code.com or find us on all of the podcasts listening apps in all of the show notes will be@sweetlifecode.com. Number two Oh three. And we do have a couple of bonuses for those of you guys that are really interested in making sure you’re nailing your 2021 business and profit plan.


The first thing is join us over in our Sweetlife community. We have just launched our premier members community. It’s $7 a month. Yes, I’m charging $7 a month for it. We really only want to make sure serious business builders are in there. And so we need to charge people something. Otherwise we just have dead weight. I don’t like dead weight in my communities.


So cruise over to Sweetlife community.com and in December, I am going to be teaching a class, a workshop taking you step-by-step through the process of laying everything out that I’m talking about high level on the podcast. So join me on December. The, let me look up the date for you 17th, as long as you joined Sweetlife community.com, cruise over there and pay your little puny $7,


I will be teaching you a live masterclass and taking your questions on top of that as you’re going through this training. And as we’re talking about what you need to do, step-by-step to lay out your year, if you’re struggling whatsoever with your offers, if you can’t hit your offer numbers that you need to hit, then go to signature offer.com. There’s nothing I can give you right now,


but you can join our wait list for our new signature offer masterclass. It’s opening up again in February of 2021. So those are some resources. They’re all there in our show notes. And let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> The steps to plan your business year for profit and lifestyle freedom. So starting with the most important thing you have to have is a primary offer that you know,


will generate the revenue that you want. So how do you know that you have to take time to craft an outline, a high value, high impact program service, signature offer, or package. So if you haven’t done that yet, that’s your very, very first step. Again, if you need help with that cruise over to signature offer.com and we’ll connect in my in February.


But the very, very first thing is making sure that you have a primary offer that is high value, high impact that people meet, where they want so much, that they are seeking you out. It’s something that is incredibly needed in your space. And they’re going to pay you to solve this for them because they either don’t want to, or they can’t do it on their own.


They can’t do it without you. So you need to make sure that you have this primary offer and that it’s nailed down. Emitted is awesome. So we can’t plan your year. We can’t plan profit unless we know you have something incredible that you’re selling. And I’m talking about the primary offer that you were selling. So after you know what your primary income source will be,


then I want you to look at the year. I want you to look at a calendar and this is how I do this. This is how I teach it. And I’m telling you what you guys have been doing this now for about seven years, every single year, it’s exponentially better. So step number one is to look at your whole entire calendar.


If you’ve ever seen behind the scenes, I literally have a 12 foot calendar going across my wall. I’m a calendar dork. It’s a dry erase calendar I got from Amazon. And I can look on my wall and whatever calendar you like to use. I want you to block off all the times in this upcoming year that you plan to travel or take off work in the whole entire year.


So if you don’t have a specific plans yet, but you know, you want to travel, make sure you block off those times now. So for example, I have no idea where exactly I am going to travel next summer, but I can tell you what I know I’m going to be on the East coast, at least a dozen times at lacrosse tournaments over the months of June and July.


And I know I’m going to be on the West coast with my other son dancing in the spring. So I’m still blocking off those times in my calendar, even if they’re just general times. And I don’t know exactly when I’m going yet, but generally I know that I’m not going to be in the same work capacity. So after you’ve gone through your calendar and you’ve thought about the times that you want to travel,


even if you don’t have specific plans yet, even if we don’t know what the world is going to look like, I want you to block them off now or you know what you’re never ever going for sure. And step number two is to block off any professional development time after you block off your personal time. So this could be time for working on any projects that you’ve set aside,


like writing that book, or maybe doing a big project, like rebuilding your website that you really can’t dive into because you haven’t blocked off all the busy-ness of work in life. So I want you to go and I want you to think, when do I want to be working on these projects? When does this make sense to me to reach this specific goal?


And I want you to note it on your calendar and if needed, you might need to take off or reduce your client or business service time to develop your new professional skills or write that book or whatever it is. So step one is blocking off travel time, family time, when you just really don’t want to be in the office setting. Number two is setting aside your professional development time and what this does,


is this a side note here? It’s super cool because as you see these conferences coming up, whether they’re online or in person or a mastermind that you want to join being offered in 2021, you know that you will have already made those things important. And so now you can look for those things that actually fit into your calendar. Look for the opportunities,


the mentors you want to work with and the trips that you want to go on professionally or the work that you want to do. So that is why blocking off your professional time. Come second, because again, those are things that they come last, usually for us as business owners and they shouldn’t. And then after you’ve blocked off and secured your personal growth time and your lifestyle time,


now let’s get into how you’re going to pay for it. Right? So looking at your primary offer, I want you to ask yourself, can you still deliver this primary offer during any of your blocked off times as the answer is yes, then there’s really nothing much you need to do. But if the answer is no, then you’ve keenly become aware that you need to sell more of your offer in less time.


So you better be strategic to pull it off, right? So therefore I want you to block off your primary selling period and product or service delivery times for this primary product or offer. I’ll give you a personal example. I always like to try to show you guys behind the scenes. So I know that I’m traveling a lot in June or July. So when I open up my,


your signature offer masterclass, for example, it is never going to be in June or July because I will never ever do it. I’m not going to be here to do that, right? So I know that the times I’ve blocked off on my calendar to invite people, to join me in my signature offer masterclass, I need to make sure that I am hitting our financial end goal benchmarks during those times.


And you need to do the very same thing. So go on block off your primary selling periods. And when you are offering that particular primary offer in order that it’s going to work with the rest of your calendar side note to those of you guys that are in somewhat of a seasonal business, there are certain seasons that align with when people buy. So,


you know, if you’re a realtor, there’s a house buying. If you will kind of season, you know, you’re not going to not plan to sell during when your primary season, it would be like a bathing suit shop closing in the summer. So although we are designing your life because we’re creating a profit plan that gives you lifestyle freedom. We always have to be obviously realistic.


When do people want to buy what you’re offering? And so take that into consideration when you’re going through and planning this. So first we’ve laid out your personal time off second, we lay out your professional time off third. We note on your calendar, your primary selling periods. Again, in order to pull off the lifestyle side of it, we need to sell more in less time.


So now we need to look at those numbers. And this is when the sobering part of the podcast training comes next. You need to crunch the numbers. This is seriously not rocket science. I am terrible at math. How many of your offer do you need to sell in order to hit your financial benchmarks for that particular product in those groups of times,


for the year. And in order to answer that you need to know some basic things about your primary offer. First, first of all, what is it cost? And secondly, what is your capacity? Your capacity is how many people you can serve at once. So what is the cost of your offer and how many people can you actually have based on your business capacity,


serving during those times of the year that you need to sell your primary offer. And then once you’ve gone through it for your primary offer, then you’re going to rinse and repeat the same step for any other offers. You have secondary offers, digital products, quick grab things that might not require so much of your time. So first I want you to do it for your primary sales objective,


your primary signature program service, whatever it is, you do know how much it costs and ask yourself how many people can I serve at a time. And these numbers become really sobering for some businesses. You may realize that with your offer, the way that it is, you can never reach your financial benchmarks. And I’ll talk to you about what to do here in a second.


Give that to you then. And again, I want you to rinse and repeat this for any other offers that you have. And so you’re going to end up with some basic but powerful math and these answers to these math questions or really sobering. So you will learn that you possibly need to alter and change some of your products, business model to serve more people,


to reach your financial benchmarks. And this is what we call scaling. This is what my company does. This is our Ninja skill. We help companies take your assets and scale them with other online business models and offers, and is a side note. If you’re ready to scale, then you know where to come. But if you’re looking at your offers and saying,


wow, I have this really amazing. Let’s say, for example, you are a career coach have this really amazing career coaching, but it’s one-on-one. So we need to, to create other opportunities for you to bring in more streams of income, using your expertise, your intellectual property, your content, and your assets, so that you can still keep your one-on-one clients.


But then we’re adding more revenue through scaling by other offers. So this math is really going to let you, you know, Hey, does my current business model actually support the lifestyle I really, really want? And then here is the next part. This is the part that most business coaches, well not tell you. So we have this number, right?


We have this dollar amount that you need to hit in order to be able to take the other time off, to head to that mastermind, to pay for that mastermind for him and sakes. So the other sobering reality, every single entrepreneur should know and opens up the world of sales. Statistics is the average sales conversion rate is 3%. Now, every industry is totally different.


This is just generally speaking, but this is the baseline number to start with. I’ve done a ton of podcast, by the way, you guys, on how to increase your conversion rates. And as an example, most of our clients close it over 80% with their sales calls. But the reality is is if you’re selling like a digital product or a low touch sales funnel,


let’s just call it 3%. I would rather underestimate and have you underestimate than overestimate. So if we have our dollar amount, right, that you have to hit, right for your primary offers and your secondary offers taking the percentage that 3% are going to convert. This is your next question. You need to ask yourself how many people do you need to reach in order to convert the numbers of products you need to sell to reach your financial benchmarks at 3%.


So if you need to sell $300,000 to sustain the life that you want, that your company, and this is all growth, but $300,000, and let’s say your product or your service is worth 10,000, then you need to sell 30 of them, right? Basic math. But now here’s the reality check. Now ask yourself, 30 sales is 3% of what number in.


This is a number of people you need to reach in your marketing in order to hit that financial benchmark. And the answer to that is a thousand. So if you you’re wrapping up your really plan and you want to mindfully create your marketing strategy around the number of people you need to reach, not the number of people you want to sell. I need to know that you know that number.


So if you need to sell 30 of your primary offer or your combination of offers in order to hit the sales conversion yeah. And that you want, how many people do you need to reach? And as you’re going back to your map, your map, I call it map. Everything’s a map in my head. As you’re going back to your calendar could a map,


right? As you’re going back to your calendar, make sure that you are blocking off your marketing time out on your calendar, that you are enabling for ample warm up time with your audience, ample relationship, building time, grassroots marketing on top of the regular digital marketing strategies so that we can increase your conversion rates to exceed your baseline sales needs and expectations.


So this is all about planning and calendar planning, but it’s important that you know, the difference between how many you want to sell and based on basic sales conversions, how many people you need to reach, because we have to plan your marketing and your strategy, the time in your calendar to make sure that you are nailing it. Well, I hope that makes sense.


Again, if you want me to roll up my sleeves with you in there and talk about these numbers we can do. So, and the workshop that I am teaching in Sweetlife community.com in December, you can join me over there and I’ll give you some extra help with this and really work through, take your personal questions. I’d love to see you in there.


So in summary, wrapping it all up here for you to plan your year for freedom. First, you start with blocking out what you personally professionally need. That’s a very first thing to block out in your calendar. If you don’t do it, you guys it’s never, ever going to happen. Then you reverse engineer the numbers, hand in hand with your calendar to make sure that you have planned the marketing programs and the service delivery systems in conjunction with the sales to reach those numbers.


In most cases, you’ll realize it’s time to scale that you’re going to have to change some of your offers, maybe add some additional revenue streams of income so that you can work less utilizing the assets you already have in order to hit the numbers and reach the lifestyle for you and that you want. So whether you’re heading on a family reunion or are going with your girlfriends to hike the John Muir trail lifestyle freedoms,


the reason why you became an entrepreneur, right? So let’s make sure that you’re planning your year in advance and you’re crunching the numbers. You’re creating the programs and the offers that are actually going to get you there. So I hope you found this episode helpful. I hope this wasn’t the first time that you were aware of the percentage of, of sales conversions and how to plan that into your marketing time and strategy.


But if it is, I’m so glad that you were here, it’s a really sobering non-sexy number that really opens up how important marketing your business is. And so today we talked about knowing how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom, making sure you’re laying out your things you need first. Otherwise it never happened. We talked about being able to assess what changes you might need to scale your current offers or change a business model in order to reach your lifestyle goals and to do so.


We need to reach your financial benchmarks. And we talked about knowing this basic math and making sure that you’re looking at your numbers and they’re going to tell you, do I need to change my offer? Do I need to make it more of a higher value? What do I need to do to my offer my program, my service in order to be able to charge that or do I need to scale other things that I already have?


So I hope you guys found this helpful. I love chatting with you. Welcome to December. I’m so glad we’re here. I hope that your holiday season is kicking off and that you’re just having a great time, that you’re super healthy, where you are and spending time with those people. You love again, cruise over to Sweetlife community.com. If you want to join me in there and connect with us further,


and thank you for tuning into this show, please share it with your friends. All the show notes can be found at Sweetlife co Right? I’ll talk to you soon.

Episode 202: Tactics To Becoming A Confident Introverted Entrepreneur – Stephanie Thoma

Stephanie Toma SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Join our online community to start networking confidently in our monthly coffee connection. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my business growth system who are introverts. You love who you are, but know that being a little “type A” could grow your business a lot.


This episode is for entrepreneurs who are introverted but know you need to become more of an extrovert to share your business with others. It can feel like a challenge and our guest today, Stephanie Thoma, author of The Confident Introvert, is here to help.  In this short episode, you’ll learn simple strategies to become more comfortable outside of your comfort zone. Plus, we also do a little practice session in this episode to help you relax. This is a great show for those who really prefer your own company but know your business needs to be shared.

At the End of This Episode You Will:

  1. Feel most settled about being an introvert in an extroverted world
  2. Have meditation/prayer practice to calm your nerves
  3. Understand how to manage external communications while remaining the introverted person you love to be.

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:


You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back again to this sweet life entrepreneur podcast today, Or talking specifically with those of you who feel like you are an introvert and you’re an entrepreneur you want to lead in your space,


but there are some different social barriers that you have trouble approaching and crossing as an introvert and the work that you do in your business. You want it to feel authentic, how you show up on social media. You want it to be authentic to who you are, and you really love your comfort zone. And so today on the show, we’re talking to Stephanie Toma and Stephanie is truly an expert at helping those of you who are introverts to really step out and lead in your space.


She is a networking strategy coach event, host and founder of the confident introvert. She’s also an author of a new book that came out this past June called the confident introvert. She is an introvert herself and she’s facilitated over a thousand events and established a fulfilling career. Helping people generate meaningful connections at online and in-person events. And her mission is to help you feel confident and establish really amazing business relationships that catapult you forward in your career.


Stephanie has been featured by Forbes business, insider entrepreneur thrive global, and so many other places, including being invited to speak at Harvard, Northwestern, and Boston universities, as well as internationally to date, Stephanie has helped thousands of people just like you. You’re an entrepreneur, or you want to step into leadership. She’s helped thousands of people like you to make sure that you can celebrate your strengths as who you are and be authentic with confidence and make meaningful connections.


It’s not sounding so great. I’ll be honest with you. I learned so much. I’m not an introvert. I’m definitely an extrovert. And so many of the strategies we talked about on today’s show, including like a quick short guided meditation that we went through was so powerful. So this show is for you introvert entrepreneurs, but it also is for those of you guys that might actually be going so fast at a trillion gazillion miles an hour,


that you need some resetting techniques too. So I was so excited to invite Stephanie onto the show. At the end of this show, you are going to have solutions to how to approach anxiety and different hacks to get through times when you’re anxious, you are going to know how to approach social media as an introvert and how to show up across social media.


And you’re going to get tips on how to network, even though we’re talking about online networking, how to network confidently and different web apps, strategies, and different ways that you can connect with people that isn’t just doing it cold really ways to enter you into relationships with people in a way that feels confident to you. So if all that sounds great, stick around because we’re going to dive in all the show notes from today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com,


including all of the business programs available to you to develop your programs, your signature offers, and your 2021 business strategy cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. We’re here to help. Let’s go ahead and dive in.<inaudible> All right. Hey, you guys, April here and I am joined by Stephanie Toma. And today we are talking, especially to all of you introverts out there.


You are experts your leaders, your entrepreneurs, your creatives, you know, you are where exactly where you’re supposed to be, but maybe there are some struggles that you have that other entrepreneurs may not have as far as how to be confident and own who you are as a person and the business side of it. And that is why Stephanie Toma is here on the show today.


Stephanie, thank you so much for joining us. Tell us a little bit about you and your area of expertise when it comes to confident introvert entrepreneurship. Yes. Hey April, thank you for having me. So my company is competent introvert and there are a few different tiers there. I do individual coaching focused on leadership development and also a variety of webinars focused on networking,


remotely, networking in person, and also cultivating authentic competence. That’s rooted from within. I’m certainly not about faking it until you make it. It’s about actually from a root level, understanding what are the roadblocks and navigating those to have an authentic sense of confidence that is unshakable, even as an introvert, there’s such a common misconception that if you get your energy from solitude,


which is the definition of introversion, that, Oh, you’re meant to be a wallflower and that’s not true as introverts. We can authentically connect with more than just one person it’s quite possible, but there are just little tweaks that can help us navigate social spaces. I love what you said. If you get your energy from solitude, I never realized that was the definition.


I’ve actually think there’s probably a lot of people that can relate to that and be like, Oh gosh, maybe, maybe I do have some, some aspects or characteristics of introvert than I, then I didn’t even realize that, you know, people just really, really get their energy from that space. So thank you so much for being on the show and you are the author of a new book.


We want to make sure that you mentioned that just came out for those of you introverts. Tell us really quick about your book. Yes. Yeah. So competent introvert, a practical Guide to connecting with others at networking events and beyond it came out this past June. And it’s all about how to go from point a to point B point a being I would like to connect with people.


I would like to get out there and grow in my career, whatever that looks like. I like to become clear on my goals and achieve them become successful, but how do I get there? So this book really fills in those gaps and leverages the most fun way to get ahead in your career, which is through making authentic friendships, which is your network and coming from a place of,


okay, how can I help people? And then, Oh, I have a bunch of friends and maybe I can ask for help when I need it. And it becomes this really synergistic sort of experience, but it’s all about taking the first step and beginning to network. So basically I have hosted over 1000 networking events and before I hosted network events, I was attending them.


So that’s what prompted writing the book. I realized that there’s magic and there’s learning in numbers and having been to a high volume and hosted them. I was really excited to put pen to paper and just let this flow out of me last year. I love that what an amazing resource for people. And so you have attended thousands of events, you’ve hosted over a thousand events and you are stereotypically.


What somebody would say is, yeah, I’m an introvert. And so this like really leads us into the very first step that you’re going to share with us today. Let’s talk about just some general anxieties for introverts and some of the things that introverts experience that other entrepreneurs might not experience as far as from the social emotional standpoint at these events. Can you share a little bit about what that feels like for an introvert versus somebody who’s just super out there and in everybody’s business and face like me?


Yeah. And Hey, it’s great. We need both ways that everyone shows up, but I would say that one of our core needs is to feel understood and to be understood. So there are a couple of different areas of dissonance that introverts specifically can come up against in a networking capacity. One scenario is everyone thinks I’m so quiet. If I speak up,


then it contradicts what people expected me and what I expect of myself and not as uncomfortable. So that’s one way. And then the other way, this is what I more recently have sort of encountered, which is people assuming that I am an extrovert because I have developed social skills and I use them actively. So there can be this dissonance of, Oh,


I’m quiet. Everyone thinks I’m quiet. I don’t want to be different than that. Or Whoa. Everyone thinks that I get my energy from others because I can talk with people, but it’s like the secret that I’m an introvert. Interesting. I mean, I can’t exactly understand, but I can see how that, that would be stressful. And so from an anxiety standpoint,


how do you manage the anxiety of attending these types of events or frankly, how do you manage the anxiety of operating as a founder, as a CEO and as an introvert? What are some of those anxieties? Yes. So in a virtual world, one of the ways that we can alleviate anxiety is by taking steps to avoid burnout. I mean, I’m sure you’ve probably experienced zoom fatigue.


It’s just a guess. It’s super common just when you bond, like from one event, the other to the other and you realize, Oh, I should be energized. I’m just sitting in my chair for eight hours straight and not doing anything. It should be fine. However, we find ourselves depleted and the antidote to that is a concept from my book,


competent introvert, it’s called a solitude sandwich. Essentially, we can do this with our socialize. We can do this during the Workday. We can translate this in person or online. And basically what that means is the contents of the sandwich. The meat of it. If you’re vegetarian, let’s go with some PB and J that’s your activity. That is what you’re actively engaging in.


Maybe it is a phone call with someone, maybe it’s going out to dinner, whatever it is, making sure that on either end of the activity before and after you have a little bit of a buffer to let’s say, go on a walk, take a stretch break. Or one of my favorites is meditation. And that kind of leads me to the next tip,


which is to engage in a meditation practice. If you don’t already, do you meditate? Is that a part of yours? Yeah. So I meditate and pray, and that is, I actually start every Monday morning. That way I don’t feel like I need to as much throughout the day, but when I’m coaching sometimes a big stretch day. So like an intensive day with the client,


I absolutely have to back away with zero stimulation, at least halfway through it to recharge it. Yes. And you know, I’d say for introvert specifically, what can cause us a lot of anxiety and strife is overthinking and you know, I have joked with people. Well, I think other people just under think, you know, like maybe I’m thinking enough and it’s fine,


but you know, sometimes I’m like, wait, there can be thoughts that are ruminating and you feel like your wheels are spinning and there isn’t a lot of traction and it’s not benefiting you in any way. So what meditation does is it acts as a way to clear the mental fog. And if there’s any confusion about what are the next steps in my life that I should take,


or do I want to go to this event? What do I want in my life? What do I want out of this event? You know, I really view it as being such a powerful tool to be in. And So many people use this tool, but are doing so wonderfully in their careers. It’s pretty much a best kept secret and it’s not exclusive to monks or to people and,


you know, praying contacts it’s really accessible to all of us. And a great way to introduce yourself to meditation is with a mindfulness meditation technique. So I call it the breath of four, four, four. It’s pretty easy to remember. And if you’re feeling stressed or feeling anxious, this could be a foreign event. Or before you go to sleep,


when you wake up, whatever that anxiety pops up, just taking a comfortable seat, rolling your shoulders back and just breathing in through the nose for four counts. And you can do this with me. I do this, I love doing this stuff. We’ll do it here. If you got listening with us, you Guys can do it right here on the podcast with us.


Okay. So if you’re driving eyes open, if you’re so breathing in through the nose for one, two, okay. See, this is why I’m addicted to yoga, Lots of yoga. So these techniques, these anxiety techniques, what’s so great about this particular show. I mean, they really aren’t just for introverts. These apply to all of us with a really high level high stimulus world.


And so those are certainly important, but I definitely can see why they’re so much more important to an introvert leader to be able to strategically think and thrive. And there’s so many different parts of being a leader in this space that require you to be articulate and, you know, be proactive and be that leader in that, in that area. But I certainly see how that could be a struggle as well.


When we are talking about leadership for introverts. One of the questions that I get all the time is from clients and podcast listeners in general and just across social media, is it as an introvert. I hear a lot from people that they feel like they need to be present on social media. They need to be doing Instagram lives or Facebook lives, or they need to be out there really in a raw live capacity.


But that is not within who they are as a person. And it may or may not actually align with the brand they’re building for their company. How do you recommend, or what tips do you have for introverts that really feel like they may or may not. I mean, this is a whole business strategy question, but just generally for them, let’s say they really do need to be active on social media.


They do need to be doing live streams. They do need to be guesting on podcasting, do need to be present. How did you help introverts approach those types of things that are completely out of their comfort zone and frankly, they don’t even want to do. Yeah. Okay. You bring up such a great point because I get this all the time with my clients as well.


I don’t want to be visible. I don’t want to be the center of attention, or I don’t want to take up more space than other people because why should I should let other people speak? And from a certain standpoint, it’s like, okay, we can rationalize and say, you know what? I don’t need to do that. So I won’t,


but that’s how you stay small. And when you become about something greater than yourself, which is the reason why you have a business, because it’s not just about you, this isn’t a big ego trip. You know, if it is then maybe rethink your entrepreneurship, ideally you’re driven by a mission that extends beyond yourself and a part of getting that mission out there and helping people is being visible.


So even though it’s uncomfortable, I will say repetition for effect. So I’ve hosted so many events. And before that I attended so many events. And what do you think it was like when I very first started? Was it seamless? Was it perfect? Was it credible? No, it was not. But I mean, and that’s kind of an extreme example.


You don’t need to attend a thousand events before you’re comfortable, you know, it’ll happen sooner, but then the more you do something, there will be so much dissonance. If you dislike it and you keep doing it. So you learn, Oh, I kind of like that part of it. And then over time there are studies that suggest that the more you see someone,


the more likely you are to like them. So these, there are studies that suggest this, like at the word hand, for, within your home environment, you know, ideally. Yeah. So it would make sense if the more you do something and you don’t do it with the intention about why have to, even the referrals I get to, I am in such a privileged place that I get to attend this event and learn about this topic and meet others who are also interested in learning.


Yeah. So I’m hearing you say, it’s basically the response to a question that we ask our clients, what will happen to your people. If you do not show up for them, what’s going to happen to them? Like what is going to happen to them? If you do not, if they don’t hear about your services, if they don’t hear about your offer,


if they don’t experience the transformation that you deliver within your book or your program or your mastermind or whatever it is, what’s going to happen to them. So I love that. And that certainly does put it in perspective because it has nothing to do with the leader themselves. It’s all about who they’re called to serve and change. And then the other thing I heard you say was that repetition is going to make it easier.


Each time you do it, you got to show up. It’s not about you. It has nothing do with you actually whatsoever. And it’s really going to get easier each time you do it. So I love those encouraging words and it is, it’s so important because every single entrepreneur is different. Everybody brings something different to the table and there’s nobody like you and nobody will be out there.


If you aren’t out there, you won’t be out there. And that’s a big thing. So kind of trying to transition this a little bit here. So we have these online events, right? Or we have the social media we’re out there and being present. But what we also know is it, regardless of all the social media in the world, posting that you’re doing,


what really builds business is relationships. Relationships are what increase sales, bring other people into your business, word of mouth, nothing builds a company like relationships. And so with these introverts, what tips do you have for introverts for actually networking and building relationships online? The yes. I mean, we can talk about, we could do a whole show on in-person networking events,


but you know, right now, what do you recommend as far as how to go in network remotely, how to reach out and make those first connections. How to go about doing that as an introvert. So many introverts myself included, tend to really thrive when it comes to communicating. One-on-one maybe it’s not our first choice to be on a stage, but you can get there if you want to be there.


Right? So I would say that, especially if you are wanting to ramp up your networking and you do feel, let’s say a bit of social anxiety or just don’t get your energy from that, then one way to start is by doing one-on-one networking experiences. So there are a few apps, including lunch club, Bumble, biz, and shaper. And those apps,


what they’ll do is they will match you with a new professional every week. And so you could meet up to five people and one week, if you choose to, and you know, you can meet with them from anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour, and you just never know where these conversations will go, but what’s great about them is that you don’t necessarily need to go out there and find someone,


you know, this person wants to connect. So there’s a little bit less of that factor of I’m going up to this person. Are they interested in connecting? I mean, chances are, if they’re out of virtual event, they probably are, but it’s more foolproof this way. And then let’s say, if you are interested in connecting with someone and you’ve attended a virtual event,


be that person who in the chat feature drops their LinkedIn link and says, Hey, I’d love to connect and invites people. So what I have found in my experience as an introvert and event hosts is it’s so gratifying to have people come to you. You know, when you’re the host or when you are extending an invitation, then it really does open doors for you that you wouldn’t necessarily know to open yourself.


And also attending events that have a specified networking portion. There are a lot of really great tools right now. You know, I’ve used icebreaker a lot. There’s also teleport and other different online one-on-one connection games where they could be an entire virtual event or they can be a component. But if you are looking to connect with people and don’t necessarily want to do it completely from scratch,


have a warm lead, so to speak, then that’s certainly one way to go about it. That is so smart. As we were driving into this section, I was thinking that you were going to share with us just how to send a cold message to somebody on LinkedIn, asking them to have virtual coffee. And I identify that. I was like,


gosh, that would be a really big thing. I imagine for an introvert, these tips are so good. And the fact that we’ll make sure all of these resources are shared in the show notes for you guys who are listening. So all these things from the shaper of the lunch club, but Bumble, biz, icebreaker, teleport, and obviously every place else where you can find Stephanie,


we’re going to make sure they’re on the show notes for you guys. Stephanie, thank you so much for your time today. This is a great show and it isn’t a topic we’ve really hit on very much. I think we had a show about introvert entrepreneurship about three years ago. And I still remember that realizing that there are so many different aspects of leadership that truly need to be approached in a different manner for different types of leaders.


And, and I love that this is your area of expertise, so thank you so much. And then also for our listeners that are like, Oh my gosh, this is me. You know, she’s speaking my language. They Kevin’s talk a little bit about, you have a help sheet that we’re going to include in the show notes here about the working remotely resources sheet.


Is that, is that include some of the resources you’ve mentioned or what are our listeners going to get out of that bonus to this episode? Yes. Okay. I’m so glad that you’re asking about that. So that is just an easy one page cheat sheet of different tactics from my networking remotely webinar, but also we did touch on a few of them in this call as well.


So yeah, I would certainly say if you’re interested in just a refresher from this conversation and to perhaps learn about new concepts as well, that can help you in your online networking journey, then you’ll want to go to Stephanie toma.com/freebie and that Stephanie T H O M a.com. Perfect. Perfect. And then for Stephanie’s coaching programs, we’ll make sure a link to her coaching program is in that is in the show notes for this episode as well.


Stephanie, thank you so very much, any last words you’d like to leave for our introvert founders and CEOs listening to this episode? Yes. So I would like to leave everyone with just the sentiment that if you are listening to this podcast and thinking, you know, it seems a little bit of a reach. I’m not sure if I a leader, I Know that I’m an introvert,


but I don’t, you know, the thing’s kind of stretchy for me, just knowing that having the desire to lead and having a mission greater than yourself is the first step. And I truly believe that everyone can lead once you have that clarity of what you want to stand for and lead with that’s so, so good. Thank you so much, Stephanie.


We really appreciate you. Yes. Thank you for having me April<inaudible>. Thank you so much for tuning into today’s show. Again, this was Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number 202, and Stephanie Toma was our expert guests today on the show to find all of the resources that we talked about, including how to find Stephanie’s networking, remotely strategy sheet, all of the apps that she mentioned on today’s show ways that you can work with Stephanie and she can help you walk into your authentic leadership and how to get your hands on Stephanie’s new book,


please cruise to Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 202. I’ll see you soon. Have a great week. You guys

Episode 199: How To Love Your Business Financials To Create The Life You Want – Megan Dahle and April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Megan Dahle’s FREE 36-Page E-Book: Getting Your Money Right

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in all Phases of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want to stop being scared of the money and start taking control.


You either love or hate to talk about money in your business. In fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when it comes to financial ledgers. But on today’s show, we’re gonna make you love the money and control it. Getting your money right in your business is the best feeling ever, and the first step to getting a company that’s going to scale, grow, and give you what you really want in business and life.
This week we’re diving in with guest expert, accountant and CFO Consultant, Megan Dahle, and talking about where you are now, understanding where you want to be, and making sure you’re on the right path to get there. We do this by teaching you the simple three numbers you need to know that will give you the power, confidence, and control you seek.


  1. Understand why you need to name your money
  2. Get clarity on the dangers of reinvesting every dime into your business
  3. Know the most important number that you really need to pay attention to
  4. Get a simple routine to look at your numbers without being scared

Resources Mentioned:

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back. This is sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, episode number 199. And yes, spoiler alert next week is our 200th podcast episode. And there’s some really cool stuff.

So make sure you’re subscribed. So you don’t miss out on that today. We are talking about how to love your business financials. So, first of all, if you clicked on this episode, then you’re pretty brave because the reality is that you either love to talk about money or you hate to talk about money in your business. And in fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when we’re talking about financial ledgers,

but on today’s show, we’re going to dive in to make you love your money and take control of it. Getting your money right in your business is seriously. One of the best feelings ever really start to pay yourself. You’re paying valuable team members. Nothing feels better than that, but then we need to take it a step further. Is your business actually going to give you the life that you want.

First, we have the business foundations and financials that need in place, but today we’re talking about your life. How do we have the company generate enough money? And what do we need to do to get your life, to look the way that you want it to? And today’s guest expert, Megan Dali is here to talk about all of that. So the reality is let’s face it.

You either don’t understand the money in your business, or you have zero control of your cashflow, or you’ve done a really great job getting your financial systems in place. And now you’re ready for the next level either way. This is a great episode for you to tune into entrepreneurs. Don’t inherently come wired as accountants, as a matter of fact, most entrepreneurs are creatives.

And so when it comes to these types of systems, you might run the other direction. So that’s why today’s a really important show. And these are the things we’re covering on today’s episode. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know why you need to name your money and what exactly that means. You are going to get clarity on why it might be dangerous to always reinvest your profit back into your business.

So raise your hand. If every time you make goes back into your company, raise your hand. If every time you make those back into your company, but you also pay yourself a little bit. We’re going to talk about why both of those are not good, even though everybody does it and how to start changing that pattern. So you can reach your long-term business goals and we’re diving into important things like the number one number that you should pay attention to.

And why Megan says you don’t have to know all the numbers. We’re not getting into financial accounting lingo here. You’re just going to walk away understanding the most important number that you should know and a simple routine to look at your numbers on a regular basis, to make sure that you are on the right track. And let me introduce you to Megan here,

she’s our guest expert today, and she’s a doll you’re going to love her 15 years in a Megan Dolly’s corporate accounting career. A business owner reached out to her Megan privately because she was worried that one of the partners was taking more of their fair share. After looking at the books, Megan discovered that the partner had in fact taken $400,000 out of the account without the other partner,

knowing it was this sensitive project that was a launching pad for Megan. She is now a consulting CFO who creates light bulb moments inside her client’s businesses. And she makes the numbers easy for you to understand more importantly, easy for you to use so that you can learn how to grow your business stronger and make sure you’re generating cash and that it’s producing long-term wealth benefits for you.

So let’s go ahead and tune into today’s episode. Again, all of the show notes and the resources make it has here for us can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is podcast number 199. And if you haven’t yet, please take a second to leave us a review on Apple podcasts and share this episode with your friends, other business owners who really need to take control of their financial numbers as well.

Okay, let’s go.<inaudible> All right. You guys are welcome to the show. I am here with Megan Dolly, and today we’re talking about money. We always talk about goals and so many other podcasts talk about goal setting, but what are really comes down to is actually looking at the numbers, then the path that you’re on to make it happen.

And so that’s why I’m so excited to have Megan on the show today, because this is her area of expertise. And before she introduces herself, I wanted to read something to you that she sent to me, which is why I knew she absolutely had to be here on the show, talking to you guys today. She said light bulb moments are my favorite thing.

When my clients finally see what the numbers mean, it’s like watching. One of those videos were colored by blind people, put on those special glasses and can see color for the first time. It’s magical. Those magical moments have appeared in many parts of my life. And that’s how I know I’m on the path God has designed for me. Things that start by devastate is devastating.

Disaster is turned into something beautiful. And these transformations, these transformations that make me believe that all things are possible. And so Megan is absolutely an expert. She has crazy credentials, which I’ve already read for you, but what’s so important when we bring experts on the show is understanding the why behind what you do, not only what your Ninja zone of geniuses,

but the why behind. And so I wanted to share that with you guys before we, we dove into talking to Megan today. So Megan, take a minute and introduce yourself to our audience and tell people a little bit about you and how you got to be what you’re doing Today. Sure. Well, thanks so much April for letting me come on your show.

It’s amazing. I love how many shows you’ve done your consistency. The content is like, Oh my gosh, this is stuff I actually use. Like I’ve actually implemented stuff from your podcast. And so it was no brainer that I wanted to be on this show. So I’m a small town girl. I’m from Midwest, South Dakota. I like gardening. I have my kids.

I work with the marching band at the high school. I like to volunteer there. Yeah. And the numbers are my game. Numbers are my jam. I’ve just always seen them differently. Math always came easily. And my math teachers are like, your brain just works different. I love that. Yeah. You have to have a special gift to see numbers differently.

I do not have that gift nor to any of my children. So there you either have it or you don’t. I think. And, and so we’re grateful for people like you. So how do you work with clients? Primarily you have this amazing framework that you’ve created to help entrepreneurs and business owners make sure that they’re on the right path and that they’re going to achieve their goals.

I mean, this is a tangible framework and we’re going to dive into it today, which I’m so excited to on this show. Yeah. So the whole thing is that people are scared of their numbers or they don’t know what it means. They’re timid around them conversations with their bookkeeper and their accountant. Don’t go so well because they’re using that chart in the depreciation,

but you’ve been a, the, you know, those revenues Rose, it’s almost like they don’t want you to be asking questions, right? I’m going to use some jargon. So you just stop asking me questions. What I want to get to is what’s useful for you. I mean, you don’t need to know the ins and outs of your financial statements.

What’s actually useful. That’s going to help you make good decisions that you can have confidence in and know why you made those decisions and see the progress down the road. So it’s breaking it down into what would be a need. Right? Right. And your framework that you share, and you have a book about this, we’re going to, we’re going to let everybody know how to find you is number one,

where are you in identifying that number two is where do you want to go? Where do you want to be? And that’s the one we’re really diving in here today, which I’m super excited about. And then the third one is, Hey, you know, are you really on the right path to get there? So guide us into that second part of how,

how do you protect your goals? How do you identify, you know, really what is it going to take for me to get that beach house or send my kids to college or, you know, sell my company or whatever that is. How do you work with clients to understand that? Yeah. So it’s like the second half of goal making that is completely missing.

People don’t want to talk about the math part of the goals because it’s scary math or they forget about it or, or they’re more about it’ll come set the goal, set your vision board and it’ll come. I’m more about, well, let’s go get it. Let’s not wait for anything. Let’s not sit around and wait for it, but let’s actually quantify it and then go get it.

So it’s like, yes, I want that beach house or yes, I want to sell my business for X amount so I can retire with that cash. That’s great. Now let’s put a number on it. Let’s put a date on it. And where are we at compared to that? So we can go and get that progress. What happens when you don’t do this is that you make progress towards your goals,

but you might not recognize it. And so you take that progress and you reinvest it in your business, or you use that progress towards, Oh, some other expenses that might come up or the next shiny object. And then it’s like, your three-year goal is still your three-year goals, six years down the road. Wow. That is so true. That is exactly what business owners do.

So we think that that progress that we made financially, you know, instead of putting it to maybe what you’re saying is this in goal, they just automatically invested back in the company, which could be great. Or maybe it’s not what they should be doing with that. Yeah. That’s really fascinating. Oh yeah. Thank you. Yeah. So curiosity,

I love it. When business owners get curious and they start experimenting with things, but it’s also important to like have a, if you want to be curious and experiment, that’s great. Let’s have money that’s designated specifically for that, but let’s not be taking all of our progress and throwing it at this next shiny object. Yeah. Okay. So being proportionate about what you invest,

where each time you get each time you make progress, whatever that is. So if you have 20, $30,000, instead of reinvesting all that say, okay, we’re going to put 10 to this and then, you know, 20 or 30 to that. Interesting. Okay. So super interesting. So step number one is really quantifying how much it’s going to cost for you to get to that goal and really drilling down on those requirements.

And I think that alone, like we could just end the show here. How many of you guys listening to the show have actually sat down? And I know you all have thought about what you want because you’re entrepreneurs and we’re creative. And that’s what we do. How many of you have actually sat down and crunched the numbers to figure out what it’s actually going to cost for you to get there?

Connect with us, like send us a DM on Instagram Sweetlife podcast and let us know if you’ve actually crunched the numbers. And we’ll do like a little poll on our Instagram story on this with the week. This show airs, because I guarantee you, I mean, tell me Megan, how many people actually that come to your, like, this is going to cost me a million dollars.

I’ve had one client in my five years. I’ve had one, one that’s like had everything set up and she’s like, I know exactly how much I want for my daughter’s wedding. I know how much I want for my retirement. I will know how much I want for Beneta da. Great, awesome. That was so cool to come across. It’s like,

all right, let’s work on the next step. You’ve got this covered, right? That’s right. Yeah. Okay. So yeah, it’s a 90% of people will not have that 99.9% of people will not have that. Okay. So after somebody identifies really how much, what that’s going to cost the next step you say is really assessing their progress towards that.

Is there a certain frequency in which a business owner should stop and take a look that you recommend financially about how they’re doing? Is that quarterly? Is it monthly? Is it yearly? Is there a routine that you recommend entrepreneurs are in assessing, not their monthly? I mean, this is not a show about monthly operational costs. This is a show about where I am,

as opposed to where I want to be in my future. Right. So if it’s set up correctly, you’ll just be able to look and see, okay. Part of it is just taking that money out and hiding it from yourself in a special place. That’s either getting interest or invest in somehow to protect that progress and maybe do some work for you on the side while you’re not watching.

So I’ve lost my train of thought a second. When you triggered something, when you said it’s it’s mom mode, it’s our mom brain. No, what I was saying was I feel like as business owners, if somebody is like 30th of every single month, you should do this every single quarter. Should you do this? So I think that entrepreneurs,

you know, we’re super creative people, but when somebody gives us a system, we love systems. We geek out on systems too. So do you have a consistent system where you say to your clients, Hey, we’re going to have a, check-in call every quarter and make sure that your money’s moving, where it needs to be, and you’re still on track or we need to assess what’s happened so far or just regular,

like a routine that you recommend businesses really pay attention and reassess. Yeah. I actually have only a few numbers that I want my people to pay really close attention to. Because if I tell them to, you know, start pull your financial statements every month, it’s one of those things that, eh, I got it, they pull up, open an income statement,

they look at the bottom line. They’re like, yep, that’s about right. And they move on, right? It has no meaning to them. So I actually pick a few numbers, like one that you might need to watch weekly and other that you’ll want to look at monthly and another, that you’ll want to look at quarterly just to make sure that things are going along the way that they need to be.

And we’ll do that deep dive, more quarterly. But one of the most important, one of the most telling numbers is your 60 day cash in 60 days, how much cash am I going to have in the bank to run my business? And then we make sure that what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t going back in and what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t hurting the business.

Cause that’s, you know, you don’t want to be taking out too much cash. And when you can see what your cash balance is going to be in 60 days or other types of business, if you’re like retail and you have busy seasons, we actually take that out much farther. They want to know where the cash is going to be. Cause that’s the blood.

We don’t want to be donating blood if we can’t afford it. Right. Right. Right. So smart. And so the next thing you say is to name the cash before it comes in, let’s talk a little bit about that. What do you mean by that? So once we have that cash projection created, we know what we think our cash is going to be coming in for the next couple months.

And now that we think we know what that cash is, we’re going to have a purpose for it because if we don’t have a purpose for it, what’s really easy to do is to spend it. If we don’t know at that way, coming in as man, those coaching programs, the advertising, the marketing, all it’s, it’s sexy and it’s fun and it’s,

it’s new and it’s novel. So we actually name it like, okay, we know that next week we should have about 2000 coming in. And two weeks after that we have 4,000 coming in and then we know where it’s going out in terms of expenses. We know where it’s going out in terms of the progress towards our goals. And we know what’s being set aside for a little sandbox fund cash and owe taxes.

Don’t forget about taxes. I do taxes and taxes yet. So you actually say Before it comes in, so you know where it’s going versus where somebody like myself, I have a tendency to not just name the money to actually spend the money before it comes in. So in my mind, I’ve already and I don’t actually spend the money, but I think maybe I do that.

So in my mind, it’s already saying this money is coming here for this. This money is going to this and it’s not like robbing Peter from pain, Paul, but I definitely know where my money is going well before it gets here. And so I feel like I’m doing good, according to what you say in that area. Although I’m sure that the categories in which I named my money could use some work.

And like you were saying, so you’re saying taxes, of course, business operations. And you’re saying that we really need to pay attention to the 60 day cashflow. And that is the key numbers are our listeners should be paying attention to, is that correct? Yes, that’s right. And on that cashflow, you’ll see the different categories. You’ll see,

like the marketing that one can get out of hand really quick. You’ll see the tax and all of those buckets, because truth is to get a little bit accounting, jargon ish on you, not everything that is cash out actually appears on your income statement. So your income statement might show that you’re showing have a profit, but cash is like, did you know that you paid yourself?

And did you know that you had these debt service payments? And there it goes, what you thought was your free cash flow. Right. Okay. And I’m sure this happens all the time. It’s just why people need somebody like you to make sure that you’re helping them protect their assets. So the third step you say is protecting this actual progress. So as businesses,

they have their structure in place or they’re getting their structure in place. What does it take to actually do that and put that structure in place so that the money is accumulated in the appropriate buckets so that they can reach their goals. How do you put this structure in place for your clients? So I have a really easy Excel tool in all my clients have to do is put in their bank balance.

At the top of that tool, like open up the bank balance today, it says $7,500. And it will tell them exactly what to do with that $7,500. If something’s going to stay in the business, if something is going to be moved to pay themselves and put it in their pocket, or if something is for their goals specifically for that, and going to move directly to,

I work with a lot of like personal finance people, like go put that in that account over there and your personal finance, personal take care of it. If they don’t have a personal finance person, I’m like, go put this in your savings account, your money market, account, your investment account, and just let it be happy over there. All by itself will take care of itself,

right? Who are The primary clients that you work with? I work with creative females primarily, and between being told that you’re creative and between being told that you were a woman you’re generally taught from a very young age, that numbers aren’t for you. And so when it comes to those conversations and showing people visually how this works so they can get that shift of,

Oh, this isn’t hard. I totally get this. I’m smart enough. I’m good enough. And now I feel like I am a true business person. I feel like I’m in control of my business. It’s really cool. Yeah. Super. It feels super powerful. It’s such a rush when yeah. I think as, as women, as men,

they just are expected to, but as women, when we finally take control of the numbers, it’s such a, such a feeling of, I don’t like to use the word empowered because it’s so overused, but this is a perfect instance in which she used that. And so I love, absolutely love what you do. So now I’m going to put you on the spot and I didn’t prepare you to ask these questions,

but I really want to know what are your favorite books for women founders when it comes to being smart about money? Do you have, besides your own? So let’s talk about your book, you know, getting your money. Right. I know that I hear a lot of people whose agenda and Cheryl’s book, you’re a, bad-ass at making money, which is more mindset around money.

It’s not money strategy. I personally actually loved that book. Are there any other books or resources that you recommend that our listeners who might not have a healthy relationship with money in the first place can use to kind of dive into reset their perspective? Yeah. So profit first was transformative for me. Mike McCullough is a great guy. And when it comes to bank balance accounting,

he’s the King and that’s what we’re doing and using what he has built and expanding on it. He’s really good. He’s really funny. If you listen to his books, listen to it on two X and he’s hysterical the other, I’m actually going to stand up and get the author’s name cause I can hear it. Oh, I love it. Thank you.

And then we’ll make sure you guys that we are sharing, we’re sharing these resources in the show notes too. Along with Megan spoke to one of the things that I know that businesses struggle with is just understanding the fundamentals of money. And it’s really interesting. I have a lot of clients that are CPAs and that are accountants and you know, that are finance coaches.

And it’s interesting to see as we’re helping our finance coaching clients build their business, how they approach scaling their business online and developing their coaching service versus our other businesses because they already know. So a part of the strategy is also part of the structure and the foundation of the money. It is that profit first approach. And it’s a beautiful thing as a business development coach,

you know, to go through and watch. And they’re saying, okay, well, this is the way this is going to be. And they’re very, they’re very strategic about that as far as being entrepreneurs themselves. So I, I love to ask these kind of behind the scene questions like about your own business and how do you do this and what are some of the resources that you love for your own business?

Just because I think that teaches a lot as well. So what was this other book? Cunningham has a couple of really great books. His blueprint to a successful business is like, this is why you need to understand the numbers in your business and how they make you incredibly profitable when you understand them. And he’s also not about all of the nitty gritty bits and pieces of the numbers.

It’s just the overall picture of how it flows together and how it works. Yes. Awesome. Cool. Thank you so much for sharing those. Okay. So in closing today, we have talked about how to not only protect your goals, but how to actually make your goals come to fruition because you are quantifying them to figure out the importance of how much your goals and what that looks like is going to cost you.

We talked about the importance of actually assessing your progress on a regular basis and naming the cash before it comes in and making sure that you are hiding and you’re protecting your money and you are not giving 100% of your profit back into your business that you’re pulling out these small chunks of this. And that’s a really big deal, I think for a lot of our listeners as well,

because especially in the first five years of business, like every dime they make, they put back in, and that does, you’re saying that’s a risk factor of, you’re just putting off that amount of time to even start working on their personal goals. Is that correct? That’s right. Yep. They need to start getting rewarded for the work that they do,

change your relationship with your business. Yeah. And then in your book, this ebook, you have getting your money, right. What does that look like? What are some of the things that our readers can expect to really learn from you in that book? So there are three types of numbers that you need to know in your business. There is the number that tells you,

where am I at? Like, where am I even at relative? How did I get here? What direction am I facing? When, where am I? And the second one is, well, hang on a second. Where do I want to be? And that’s the quantifying, this is what I want my from my business. This is how I want it to serve me.

And then the numbers that tell you, are you on the right path? Are you doing the right activities or does something need to shift? Do we need to take a detour in what those different numbers look like and how you can find them? Great. And so you’re going to, you’re going to dive in and guide our listeners through that process. Megan,

thank you so much for being on the show today. I appreciate your expertise and your wisdom and your sense of humor and just really making this so much more fun than I think that entrepreneurs experience a lot of times when we talk about money and being so real about the fact that you don’t have to know all the nitty gritty terminology, but these are the basic three numbers you need to know.

And our listeners can find out more about that by downloading your free book, which we will make sure there is a link to that in the show notes of this episode and where else can our listeners find you Come on over to Meghan dolly.com or connect with me on Facebook. I love conversations to begin to sit back and have 15 minutes of coffee together, sometime if you want,

Love that. Okay, perfect. We’ll make sure that those links are in the show notes. Thank you so much for being a guest. Oh, thank you so much, April. This was fun. Yes. Appreciate you.<inaudible> Thanks so much for tuning into this show. Here is a reminder that you can get all of the notes that we talked about today,

including all of the bonuses and strategies by visiting Sweetlife co.com episode one 99. And if you are in a place where you’re ready to develop your signature offer or your program now is a time to get in through pre-registration by joining our wait list for our, your signature offer and program masterclass coming in 2021, I would love to work with you and extract your expertise to create your intellectual property,

to make you be this beautiful leader and your space to learn more about our, your signature offer masterclass, simply visit signature offer.com. I’ll talk to you next week. We have episode number 200 coming right at you and almost four years of Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Rolling out so excited and you appreciate so much have a great week.

Episode 193: 3 Steps To Take Your Offline Business Online – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established offline businesses who want to launch online services but aren’t sure where to start. And experts, entrepreneurs or companies in my Start To Scale Business System”, phases 1-3.


You know the potential to reach more people and expand your reach by offering online services. But when it comes to getting started in the online space you don’t have the time to get your masters in online business everything but you deserve to know where to start so you can make wise choices for your company and your future. This episode gives you three simple steps to take your off-line company online and gives you the wisdom and confidence and clarity in your first steps moving in this direction.


  1. Have confidence in what to do first
  2. Stop being overwhelmed by the fragmented and often times ill-advised coaching
  3. Create a game plan to take your business online now

Resources Mentioned:

Get Help Extracting Your Expertise Into Your Signature Online Offer

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life. You love FASTA with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 193 here at the sweet life entrepreneur in business podcast. And I’m April beach, founder of the Sweetlife company and host of this show.
Thanks for tuning in with me another week, we are giving you another business training that many coaches charge thousands of dollars for, and I’m so glad to have an opportunity to pour into you as you’re continuing, or maybe you’re just starting out growing your business online. If we don’t know each other yet, I would love to get to know you more. You can always shoot me a DM over on LinkedIn or Instagram at Sweetlife podcast.
And if this is your first time listening to the show, go back and cruise back and listen to our trailer. Now it was almost 200 episodes ago that would release that trailer, but it will give you an idea if you are in the right place for business strategy and training today, we’re talking to those of you guys who have an established business offline,
and it’s time to bring your offline company and your offline services online. And in this show, I’m giving you three steps to start this process. And let’s talk about why this is important, just to make sure you’re in the right place, listening to the right show. That’s going to give you the right results you’re looking for. So you’ve identified, right?
You know, that there’s so much more potential to reach people and expand your offerings by offering online services. We’re going to talk about some different options of those online services today, because knowing that you want to do that, and actually then taking the step to understanding the choices that are available to you in the most efficient way are two totally separate things. And I get that.
That’s why I’m here recording this show for you today. So when it comes to getting into that online space, there is so much information and it can be incredibly overwhelming. And what we don’t want is we don’t want you launching certain online programs or offers or services or even courses just because everybody else is doing it. We want to make sure it’s a right fit for your company.
And all of that wisdom is what we’re pouring into you here on this show. At the end of this episode, you are going to have confidence in knowing what to do first, second, and third, to take your offline services online. You, if you have been overwhelmed will stop being overwhelmed by all the fragmented information, or you’re either getting information in two different ways.
It’s either super fragmented and you’re not really sure what information you can trust, or there’s so much information coming at you from software companies to business coaches about how to bring your business, that it can be totally overwhelming. And this episode is going to help you sort out fact from fiction. And it’s going to help you understand really what you should just be paying attention to here in the beginning.
And you’re going to have a game plan of what to do in what order to bring your services online. And this show just like almost all of our episodes. We have super amazing episode bonuses. So with this particular episode, to give you even more wisdom and information, I want you to download our totally free ultimate guide to online business models. So we’re talking about obviously online services here on the show,
but this is over 14 pages and it just totally lays out all the different online business model options from online courses to group coaching programs, to masterminds, even to podcasting, to help you have even more wisdom. In what direction you want to go taking your services online. So you can get that ultimate guide totally free by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide.
We’ll make sure we get that into your hands right away. Okay. So if you’re ready for these results and you want this information, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Okay. Three steps to get started taking your offline business online. So, first of all, let’s talk about what your offline business looks like. You either have a brick and mortar store,
or you’re used to providing services to people in person face to face, whether it’s hands on. And we work with a lot of healthcare providers, a lot of consultants and experts, and they want to go. And that could be you. You want to go from seeing people face to face and really expanding your reach to serve more people at a time.
And by doing so you create a business model that gives you ultimately more time and location freedom, as long as it’s done strategically. So if you have a current business that provides face-to-face services, one-on-one services on location, then this is the perfect episode for you to be listening to step number one, as you move in the direction of thinking, Hey, you know,
I really want to expand my business with online services. Step number one is to choose your online business model. And if you have been listening to this podcast now for almost four years, you know, we talk about online business modeling all the time. So if you want even more resources, cruise back to our podcast website@sweetlifecode.com and you can actually search all of our episodes for all of the online business modeling shows,
wanting to make sure, you know, that’s a tool available to you, but right now I want you to just hone in and focus in on what do you imagine that that looks like when you’re working with your clients? Not face to face, it could be in zoom could be by the phone, or it could be creating great content and videos for your clients and distributing it to them.
What does that look like to you? And what do your clients really need from you? If you listen to last week’s episode, we talked about what clients are really looking for, what buyers are buying right now. And people love on demand. People love having resources and answers and quick results at their fingertips. And so, as you’re thinking about creating your online offers,
certainly consider what is it that my clients really want in addition to maybe seeing me face to face. And some of your clients probably have been telling you this already. And if you ask your clients, they will tell you they’ll say yes, I want to meet with you virtually or yes, I would love to be part of a mastermind. So if you ask your clients,
they will tell you, they are always your best place to do. Research is going to your perfect clients are ready. But right now I want to dive into the three most common types of services that offline companies are launching as online offers. And they are online courses, online coaching programs and online memberships. You might have actually thought about one of these types of options before.
And the reason why offline companies are going to these is because they’re really great ways to already package the expertise that you have within your company. There are great ways to utilize your assets. And we’re going to dive into that here in just a second. But step number one is choosing your online business model. Let me give you a quick definition of what each one of these three most popular types are type.
Number one is by launching an online course. So an online course is a great way to take your established content, your things that you’ve already done. You know, in most cases with offline businesses and the established companies we work with, we don’t want to reinvent the wheel. We want to take your expertise and your assets and things you’ve already created within your business and just reframe them,
repackage them, reprogram them. If you will, to offer as an online course. And online courses are most commonly offered two different ways. The first one is called evergreen. Evergreen is where you would take your information. You would turn it into videos in that your clients could purchase it and buy it and absorb the information any time. So they’re prerecorded videos that people can go through any time.
And then the second type of online course is literally it live taught online course where you’re still taking the content. You’re still taking the information and you may teach this in a combination of zoom, live coaching and some PowerPoint presentations, maybe some videos as well. So the two most common types of online courses that offline businesses are launching as online services are evergreen again,
which is pre creating videos that people can watch on demand whenever they want. We already know people are buying those types of things. And number two, launching live coaching as an online course, I will say that for established business owners, I would caution you against launching really cumbersome, huge live online courses. If you’re still running your local business, unless you have a team to help you do that.
So just a little caution there. It can be really time consuming. The second type of online business model that many offline companies are adopting is live coaching. And this is where you take a group of people. Maybe you’ve served them one-on-one before and you start coaching them live online through zoom. You can provide phone consulting, you can provide FaceTime consulting, the medium and how you deliver.
It really doesn’t matter. It’s what you’re delivering. So this is actually providing live coaching without being face to face. And you can provide this one-on-one or you can create a group and provide live consulting to a group, either on a onetime basis for a specialty topic or on an ongoing basis. And the third type of business model that offline company are most commonly launching as online offers our memberships memberships are really amazing.
It’s where you take your expert content and you deliver it on a monthly and a quarterly basis to people in a community that you have created. Memberships are a great way. And we’ve especially in 2020, been working with established businesses who have community already around your business. Maybe it’s a brick and mortar store in creating a membership amongst all your customers. It is an amazing way to connect with them,
and it’s an amazing way to connect them with each other. And memberships is a great thing to consider. If you have content, if you have coaching, maybe there’s some sweet deal or discount that you want to deliver to your customers. And it’s also a great way to create a program for those customers of yours that want to access you on an ongoing basis for a longer period of time.
So they can achieve better results with the services that you deliver. A membership community is a great way to do that. So your first job and choosing, gosh, you know, how am I going to bring my offline business online is to consider what business model do you want to launch? And we just talked about the three most popular ones, courses,
coaching or memberships, but don’t forget to download the ultimate guide to online business models. So you can see all of that. And again, you can grab that by going to April beach.com forward slash ultimate guide. Okay. Step number two is to develop your actual offer program or service. So you’ve already chosen the business model of how you want to deliver it.
Now we need to organize your assets and we need to take your ideas, and we need to take your expertise out of your head out of other places in your business and bring it in to creating your new online offer. So here’s some tips to do that. Number one is to sit down and extract your expertise. What are you known for? What are you great at?
What things have you already created in your business? We don’t want to recreate the wheel here with your first online offer in order to keep your current customers coming back to you. We want to give them more results in a different way within your established area of expertise. And it’s also going to save you literally months, if not years, to create something brand new from scratch,
right? So let’s take what you already do, and let’s scale it online with an online offer for you. So extract your expertise and start with what you already have. Go through your archives, go through things that you’ve created. Content you’ve already created in your business in the past and give yourself an opportunity to take an assessment and an inventory of all the great things you’ve already created.
I guarantee you, if you’re an established business owner, you’ve created some amazing things and some excellent content in your business, and that’s why people love you, right? So go back and see what you’ve already done to help you realize your potential. So for what you can deliver to people through an online program and service, and then also consider what people love the most from you.
If you are a brick and mortar retailer, and you have every single Monday, it’s a new shirt that you may feature on social media and it’s a new item drop, right? Well, people probably go crazy about that. So how can you take that and bring it into a new membership community? Or how can you create content around that to deliver into a coaching program?
Perhaps maybe you can launch an online course, helping people stylize themselves. For whatever reason, there are so many different opportunities that you can take your established expertise and just tweak it a little bit and create your online offer instead of starting from scratch. And then the last tip is what are the most common questions people ask you the easiest way to create an online course or coaching program or membership community is by going through in writing down,
if you haven’t, before you should be in documenting the questions that people most commonly ask you in your business and then taking those questions and the answers to those and turning it into your first online offer. Whether again, you choose a business model and how you deliver that, whether it’s coaching or a course or a membership community, maybe even a podcast, but go through and figure out what are the most common questions that people me all the time.
And that is a great place for you to scale what you’ve already done, extract your expertise and explode it into more sales and an exponential reach. So step number two is to actually go through and develop the content that’s going into your offer program or online service. And then step number three is to develop your first marketing funnel. So first you have to pick the business model.
Second, you have to organize your assets and your material and actually create your program. And third is to go through the process of creating your first marketing funnel. So your marketing funnel is where you’re going to attract more people than just your local faithful and your it’s, where you’re going to convert your local faithful to start connecting with you online. So your first marketing funnel is usually developed in a very simple way where you would create something free to give away that solves a problem,
but not just any problem, your something free you’re giving away online should solve a problem that you discuss and also solve within your new online offer. So create something free. It could be a short video and tips could be a checklist. It could be a strategy sheet, a tip sheet. If you’re a nutrition coach, it could be creating a sample menu for the week,
whatever it is, create something of value that solves a problem for your customers that relates to the service that you’re going to be launching online. And then step number two is to create one page on your website. That includes a form where people can receive that free item. And then step number three is to create a marketing plan, to share your content and to share your message across social media.
You could do podcast guesting. You could go to networking events, both offline, and now we’re starting Kevin’s to see more local networking events happen again. And of course you can run ads. There are numerous ways where you can get eyes on your marketing funnel and grow your list through that. The reality is is this first marketing funnel is important because it shifts people who might be used to only connecting with you online.
Maybe the only way you have sold people into your services before is having them sign a contract face to face, or actually seeing them face to face. So your next step is to determine how are you going to funnel people in to your new online offers could be creating this new first marketing funnel for new people, or you might consider creating a new online experience with a welcome page for your established customers saying,
Hey, guess what? We love working with you in person. Now we’re excited to also work with you online. And so it can be handholding your established local one-on-one client and helping them to onboard and get comfortable with your new online offers. We want your established clients to be the first ones to interact with your new online offers because they’re the ones that love you.
They’re the ones that trust you. And they’re the ones that are going to really help your new online offers grow. They are your biggest cheerleaders. So three steps to take your offline business online. Number one, choose online business model. How are you going to deliver your online services? Number two, develop your offer service program, course membership, whatever it is,
develop the content and the curriculum in there. If you struggle to turn your ideas and your expertise into world-class programs, that’s where my company, the Sweetlife company comes in to help. You can always cruise over to Sweetlife co.com and we will teach you how to extract your expertise and turn it into a worldclass signature offers and programs. And then number three is build your first marketing funnel,
whether it’s a marketing funnel to move your established clients online, or it’s a new marketing funnel to generate new cold leads to your online services. I just can’t emphasize that enough, the importance of valuing the current clients you have and providing different ways for your current clients to absorb your established expertise before you go, and you create a brand new offer, that’s a cold offer to people who’ve never worked with you before.
We want you considering what business model your established clients want and need so that you can continue to pour into them and build those relationships. And we can create repeat customers to spend money again and again and again with you, once you nail your online business model with your current customers, then we talk about expanding to a cold audience and really expanding your reach and exploding your sales even more.
So just start with what you have, start with what you know, and start with the people you already know better than anybody else. Nobody knows your established clients better than you do. And again, start asking them questions. How did they want to work with you online? How can you better meet their needs through digital delivery of products, information, services,
and support. And those are your three steps to take your offline business online, choose your business model, develop your offer, build your first marketing funnel. All right. I hope you found this incredibly helpful. We really want to simplify things here for you. I know it can seem very overwhelming, especially when you’re new to the online space. If you’re in that place where you feel overwhelmed,
hit us up anytime, and we’re happy to jump on a business triaged call with you and get you started in the right direction. You can find us@sweetlifeco.com and all the show notes we talked about here on this episode, the ultimate guide to business models and how to learn, how to turn your ideas and expertise into your signature offer can all be found in the show notes for this episode by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 93. All right, you guys have a fantastic week, so great to pour into you and talk to you soon.

Episode 189: Online Business Terms and Acronyms Made Easy – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Ultimate Guide to the online business model that’s right for you

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for established companies looking to scale with online business models and new entrepreneurs launching online and feeling lost in the terminology and acronyms.


Online entrepreneurs speak a different language and for companies who are looking to scale with online business models, the terms can be confusing and time consuming to learn. To help you be in the know and talk like an online pro faster, this show is a glossary of online terms made easy.


  1. Know what the most common online business terms mean
  2. Stop feeling confused with online business lingo
  3. Have confidence and knowledge to make decisions 

Resources Mentioned:

Join Our Community to Scale Online Faster

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate<inaudible>. Hi everyone. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 189 and everything we’re talking about today, including the bonuses and the resources that we’re providing with this show can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com
forward slash one 89. So if you’re on the go and you can’t take notes or you can’t pause and go to another website on your phone. No worries. Just remember Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 89. We’ll give you everything that you are looking for when you have an opportunity to go grab it. Welcome to the show. My name is April leach.
I’m the host here on the show and we’re coming up almost on four years of this podcast. Thank you so much to all of you. Who’ve been crazy faithful, awesome listeners for so long. And if you’re new to this show, I’m super glad to be connected with you. I teach small businesses and entrepreneurs how to grow their company by scaling online and everything we talk about here on this show are proven and trusted business trainings to help you do that.
In fact, a lot of our shows are so valuable that a lot of coaching and consulting firms charge thousands of dollars for the tools and the strategies and the action items that we bring to you here on this show. So I’m really, really glad that you are here. If you haven’t clicked subscribe yet, or if you haven’t clicked subscribe in a while,
please do. So. We are on all of your favorite podcasts. We’ll see devices including obviously where you’re listening to us right now. So just go in and make sure that you’ve clicked subscribe, and we do really appreciate all of the reviews. You guys leave us on Apple podcasts. So at the time of this recording, it’s the end of August.
And if your life is like mine, which I’m assuming it is we connect. And that’s why you listen here to this show. That’s means that things are about to get even crazier than they were before, regarding whatever is happening with school and your kids and running and managing and owning the company that you do. And so many things are up on the air and it’s just a hard time.
And actually when this show drops, I am on my way to drop my oldest son off to college. So I’m right there with you. And I want you to know that you’re not alone and we’re still here consistent behind you, giving you the tools you need to grow your business throughout all of the unpredictable world of 2020. So I just want to take a pause for a sec and just say kudos to you for being here for listening to this show,
whether you’re listening to it live as soon as it drops or you’re coming back to this, you know, years later, this going to be one of those shows. I think people refer back to a lot because it just really covers a lot of online business basics that don’t change. I just want to say you’re doing awesome job. So let’s go ahead and dive into what you can expect with today’s episode.
We are talking about online business terms, acronyms made easy. And so this particular show is for those of you who have established businesses, and it’s time to scale your company by utilizing online business models and strategies and funnels, or those of you who are new to launching a business, and you’re launching your company online. Here’s the deal online entrepreneurs speak a different language.
There are some words that we use in the online business space that, you know, I really actually have to catch myself sometimes when I’m talking to people because all of a sudden this blank look will come over their face. And I will have said a term or an acronym that just doesn’t make sense to anybody else, unless you’re already in the online business space.
And so if you’ve ever been talking to somebody or reading a blog or listening here on the show, and I’ve said something that just kind of went, Whoa, I have no idea what that is is April. Well, this particular episode is designed to fix that for you, because the reality is is that, that we don’t want you to be confused.
These things are not hard as long as you know what they are. So I want you to be confident. I want you to know what other people are talking about. I want you to know what you’re talking about. I want you to know what you’re looking for in certain functions of software and in website things that we’re going to be discussing today. And it all comes back to understanding the terminology and the acronyms that are used to describe functionality of software in different results and benchmarks.
Frankly, you need to hit in your business in order for it to grow. So the end of this episode, you’re going to know what the most common online business terms mean. You’re going to stop feeling confused if you’ve felt confused before with all this online business lingo, and you’re going to have the confidence to move forward, continue in conversations, ask intelligent and educated questions.
Now that you’re kind of past this entry level threshold of online business terms. And I do have a resource for you today. So if you’re just getting into online business scaling, if you’re taking your established business and you’re wondering what to do, should I launch a course? Should I launch a video series? Should I launch a membership or a digital, or even an in person type of retreat?
Some of you guys are even wondering, should I launch a podcast? I have a completely free 14 page resource for you. It’s called the ultimate guide to the online business model. That’s right for you. You can go grab that in our website for the show notes again, which can be found@lifepodcast.com forward slash one 89. So to give you more clarity on actually what you’re building and how you’re scaling your company,
today’s show, make sure that you go grab that ultimate guide to online business models in our podcast, show notes totally free, and that will save you years of time and really thousands of dollars of building the wrong kind of online business. Okay. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Okay. Today we’re talking about online business terms made easy and I’m going to go through,
I’m good. Literally going to name the term and give you the definition of it. So it’s just like English one Oh one, except for, for online business and making sure that, you know what things mean. I’ll give you some examples of things so that you can listen to this show and get out of here and understand all the weird language of online business owners.
So the very first thing I want to cover is the term business model. So a business model is the type of business you’re building. Your business model is how you serve clients and how you make money. So what services you offer, how you deliver those services and what actually does that exchange of delivery look like some different examples of business models are in-person services delivered,
virtual services delivered. And again, I gave you that whole entire go grab the ultimate guide to online business models. We have masterminds, we have courses, we have membership sites. We have webinars, whether they’re recorded or on demand, the sky is the limit. And you really need to understand what your business model is, or you need to understand what the injuries result that a business model is going to give your company in order to scale smart.
We don’t want you to just going out there and launching a course cause everybody else is doing it because it’s not necessarily actually in a lot of cases, even the right thing to do to scale and grow your company. So understanding term number one is your business model. Again, that is how you make money, how you serve clients and what that delivery of service looks like.
Next term is lifestyle business. Now this gets a little confused and it’s not a really common online term, but I wanted to throw it in here because if you are a listener to the show, you know that I’m a lifestyle business development expert, and that might seem a little confusing. So I just wanted to clarify that to you and lifestyle business is creating a business model that works with your life.
It’s the way you plan to live your life and then reverse engineering that to build a company that’s going to get you there. It doesn’t mean that the business itself is necessarily a lifestyle business. So you can have a lifestyle business. It gives you the owner, the freedom to be with your family and hang out with your kids more and travel, whatever that looks like for you.
But the business itself, you know, you don’t have to sell surfboards the business itself, whether you’re in marketing or consulting or, you know, video editing, whatever it is that you do, the business itself doesn’t have to be lifestyle focused, but you are building a business that is designed around your lifestyle. And hopefully that kind of clarifies that a little bit.
As a matter of fact, 90% of the companies that I work with to help them grow and scale are not actual lifestyle businesses, but the owners of those companies want a business. That’s going to give them that lifestyle that they want to, hopefully that clarifies that a little bit for you. The next term is I see a, I see a stands for ideal client avatar.
This is used a lot, and you’re going to hear it a lot, especially when you’re new to the online business space, your ideal client avatar, or your ICA, but really the perfect clients that you are called to serve that need, want your offers. So they’re very specific people. This is a very specific set of grouping of people that are ideal to buy your product or buy your services.
That is your ICA. So if you ever hear that term thrown around, if somebody is saying, Hey, well, you know, what are you marketing to? And what are you selling? And who’s your ICA. It means what is the specific subset of people that need and want what you have the next term is IP, which stands for intellectual property.
So this is turning your ideas and your services and your methods. It could also be your secret sauce, your formula, your steps of delivery into your intellectual property. So intellectual property protections allow for creators and owners like you to actually go ahead and make sure they patent and trademark your process. So you don’t necessarily have to do that, but intellectual property,
it’s connected to the ownership of things that are created from your mind. So an example of intellectual property is my start to scale business system, or in the past, it’s been called the sweet life entrepreneur roadmap. They’re my five steps that I share here on the show. A lot that take people from the beginning of your business, all the way through the end of that life cycle of a successful company,
growth over a period of years, that’s my intellectual property. It’s my system. It’s my methodology. I own that. So if you have a method or a system or something, that’s your secret sauce. That is your intellectual property. So the term IP is thrown around a lot, both online and offline when it comes to the ownership of things that are created by your mind,
your methodology, your systems, the next term, which is really important for those of you guys, for starting out, you’re brand new in business. This is something you have to know this term. And this term is M VP, not most valuable player. It actually stands for a minimum viable product. And your minimum viable product is when you develop your ideas into your new product,
your first offer and everything is being sold sufficiently to satisfied customers. So this product is designed and developed. Usually after some feedback from your first customers, your minimum viable product is your minimum service. That has to be proven in order for you to realize that your company is and will be a success. So it’s a very first offer or your first program,
your first package of services or your first product that you’ve created. We have to prove that it is at least minimum leave viable within your market space. So are people buying it? That’s your MVP. You have to hit your MVP. It is the one of the first challenges to overcome as a new business owner. The next term is lead magnet, and this is getting more into marketing.
So your lead magnet is something of high value that you give away for free, that people are willing to give you their name and their email contact information for sometimes their address. And some other information lead magnet is also referred to by some online coaches, as freemium or freebie. The reason why I don’t love that term, and we don’t use that term here on this business show is because your lead magnet is,
I said in the initial definition needs to be of high value. So I’ve done tons of different podcasts on lead magnets and how to create them of high value. So I’m not going to go on squirrel tangent right now, but you might have heard the term freemium or freebie. And those are people that give away kind of crappy stuff, free expecting to grow their lists.
That’s not going to grow your list by the way, it has to be something of high value to get high quality leads. So your lead magnet is something that you create to give away could be a video series. It could be a download. It could be a, a white paper, something of high value to prospects to gather their information. The next term is called conversion tool.
It’s also called the conversion product. This refers to how you turn the leads on your list, the names and the email address on your list and your database into paying clients. So the lead magnet brings them in and gives you the lead, but then we have to still convert them into paying clients. And a conversion tool is usually a little bit different,
a little bit more contact, more relationship based than a lead magnet. Examples of a conversion tool are live webinars, phone calls, or discovery calls, triage calls, personal assessments. It can also be just a sales page. You can have a great sales page that converts your leads into buyers. It could be a shop page. Those things are applicable as well,
but the conversion product is where you take the lead and turn them into buyers sometimes based on what it is your company does, we don’t even really need the lead magnet so much. We might be able to just take cold subscribers and turn them into buyers just with a conversion product. And if you don’t know, a cold subscribers are coming up, okay,
the next term is called a funnel. Now this is thrown around all the time. There are a bunch of different types of funnels. You guys, there are marketing funnels and sales funnels and product funnels. I’m going to give you the term here, understanding in expecting that many of you are just entering the phase in your business where you’re ready to grow it online.
So we’re going to talk about it, actual marketing lead generation funnel here. And I’m going to give you the definition for this. This refers to the building of landing pages on your website, where people can opt in and fill out a form and give you their information. And it refers to the connecting of the rest of your software technology to give them what you have promised.
So a funnel is all of your marketing. Literally imagine like a tornado. And on the top is all of your marketing. It’s all of your social media posting. They might see something that interests them. Example, your lead magnet might interest them. They say, Oh, that’s a really high value thing. I think I want that. And they’re going to go to a landing page that ideally should be built on your website,
where they give their name and email address to get that high value lead magnet. And then what happens next is you send them an automatic email. It says, here you go. Here is the thing that I promised you I’d give you after you gave me your name and email address. So the next part of that funnel is actually that welcome email and the delivery of whatever you promised.
And then it’s also sending them to a thank you page saying, Hey, thank you so much for giving me your contact information. We talked about it two weeks ago here on the show that receiving somebody’s lead is a privilege and you need to care for it. Very importantly, that’s not even a word. You need to really care about people to give you their name and email address.
That’s what I’m saying. The funnel is creating the pages and connecting together the technology, the landing page, the email marketing, and the thank you page to make sure that the delivery of what you promised is done well, that is the tech side of building a funnel. So when we’re talking about funnels, yes, there’s marketing strategy. Yes. There’s what you say and what you’re giving in this definition.
I’m giving you this, the specifics of the tech side of actually building a funnel. It includes your landing page. It includes a thank you page and includes an automatic email that goes out to give somebody what you promised. Okay. Now let’s go into warm and cold audiences. So audience are people who have never heard of your business before. And a warm audience are people who are already familiar with your brand.
So if you hear those two different terms thrown around, or if you’re planning doing an ad campaign, somebody who’s helping you with that might say, are we running these ads to a cold audience or a warm body? And that is the difference. Okay. Three more terms, are you with me? And by the way, all of these terms are going to be written out for you.
For those of you guys who are in our online business community and our app over at mighty house, you can join for free. I’ll put a link in the show notes, or you can just go to sweet life, community.com. If you’re like, Oh my gosh, I want to, you know, write all these down. I’m going to go ahead and upload all these terms just right into our community app.
So for those of you guys who are joined there with us@sweetlifecommunity.com, you don’t even have to opt into it. I’m just going to put all these terms there for you so you can always reference, okay. The next term is S E O S E Oh, stands for a search engine and optimization. It basically means how visible is your website or organically to search engines like Google.
So are people going to your website, are people Googling things or searching for things? And is your website coming up S E O like the terminology for it? Search engine optimization is the practice of increasing the quantity and the quality of the traffic to your website, through organic search results. So this doesn’t mean pain to have your site show up on Google AdWords.
These are things that you do within the copy of your site tags within your site. There are tons of different ways that you can optimize your organic search results for your website and you need to, and that is what we call SP Oh, the next terminology is copy. So the next term is, copy. We hear this all the time and we’ll work with new clients.
And you know, I have to be careful again, I’ll say, okay, give us the copy for your website in the division of my company, where we build Kajabi websites, I’ll say, give us, you know, don’t forget, you need to have a copy of your website. And sometimes new businesses will be like, Oh my gosh, what are you talking about?
What is that? So copy is just your text. Copy. It can refer to the text and your website. It can refer to the text and your social media posts. It can refer to the text in your email, body or other places. It’s literally just the writing of your text there. The words you write. And I will say that every company should have a good copywriter as an essential part of your team.
There are people that have a gift for copywriting, and there are people who don’t. So if you really want to grow your company online, it is going to be important that you learn how to become a good copywriter, or that would be one of the top priority roles I would recommend for you. If I was working with you to scale your business is bringing a really great online sales and marketing copywriter aboard your team.
So copy, just reverse to your text. And then the last term I want to cover is swipe files or swipe copy. So this refers to texts and images created by other companies that you’re allowed to swipe like swiper, no swiping, except for this is like swiper. Yes. Swiping those of you that have older kids like me. You know what I’m talking about?
So this basically means when you are promoting something in conjunction with somebody else, that company may send you what’s called swipe copy or swipe files. They’re literally pre done social media posts that you can just swipe and put out on your own social media to make your life easier. So swipe, copy and swipe files literally means that you can take it and steal it and copy it.
And that’s what it’s designed for. So today we covered a lot of online business terms and acronyms that we usually find that companies new to the online space aren’t really familiar with. We defined business model. We define lifestyle business. I see a, I P am VP. So again, ICA ideal client avatar, IP, intellectual property, MVP, your minimum viable product or service lead magnet,
conversion tool funnel, warm and cold audience. S E O copy and swipe files. Wow. Okay. That was your online business. One Oh one glossary class. I hope you guys, this is very, very helpful. You know, we’re here to help you. We’re here to level up your entrepreneurial IQ because you are amazing at what you do and no successful business owner has time to sit there and wonder what a stupid acronym is.
So we’re just going to tell you, because I know you don’t have time to figure it out and we are here to make you a success. Thank you so much for tuning into this show. Let me go ahead and recap a real quick, where you can find the resources that we’ve talked about. First of all, you are invited to join our online business owners and entrepreneur app.
It’s not a Facebook group anymore. We dumped Facebook months ago. Thank heavens. We now have a custom community app where you can create your own business profile and network with other businesses and get tools here from the show. And you can join that for free by visiting Sweetlife community.com. I’m going to drop in all of these terms into that app, for those of you guys who are in there.
So if you’re listening on the go and you want to come back and reference it, make sure that you join us in our app also for you. Go ahead and grab our online business model guide. So I have 14 pages of the ultimate guide to choosing the online business model. That’s right for you. You can get that in the show notes of this episode by visiting sweet life podcast.com
forward slash one 89. Okay. I hope you guys have an amazing turnover of the month at the end of this show. We’re rolling over from August to September, and this means you have three months left to close out this year, strong and prepare for 2021 here on the show. We’re going to be working on a lot of 2021 prep and helping you like we do at the end of every year,
prepare your business for the next year, prepare your signature offers, level up your marketing, and really scale your business online. So make sure that you’re subscribed because we are about to dive in and roll up our sleeves with you even more over the next 12 weeks to make sure that 2021 is the best year yet. And sure as shit, all of us need that.
Oh my gosh. All right. Well, you guys have an awesome week. Thank you again for tuning into the show. I’m April beach. 

Episode 186: How To Survive A Facebook or Instagram Hack On Your Business – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Follow us at @sweetlifepodcast on Instagram! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Every business who operates on Facebook and Instagram.


“It will never happen to me” 
Famous last words until you wake up and your Facebook and Instagram business accounts are gone. 
As a business owner, you likely spend a lot of time and resources on Facebook or Instagram. You post, go live, comment with others, research hashtags, produce IGTV videos and spend too many hours filtering your photos. But these necessary evils are a great way to attract your ideal audience and increase your exposure. Right up to the moment they’re wiped out – with no communication or consent from Facebook, no opportunity to submit a support ticket, no one to talk to for help. 
This is what happened to April Beach and The SweetLife Company, and in this show, you’ll learn all of the things no one tells you to do to save your company, keep your followers and survive being wiped from the Facebook and Instagram planet. 
This is not an episode about internet security. This is an episode about business survival. 


  1. Know how to protect and preserve your content
  2. How to control the out of control
  3. How your company can bounce back after the hack

Resources Mentioned:

To regain control of your Facebook page you can start by claiming it was been hacked through this link

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show. Thanks for tuning in here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And today’s episode, I’m downloading those of you who have been asking and asking about what actually happened to our business,
Facebook and Instagram accounts. Many of you follow me or followed me on social media. And you knew that we literally got wiped off the face of the earth. Like we’ve never existed after, well, over a decade of being on Facebook and years and years being on Instagram. And so in this episode, I’m going to share exactly what happened and how to survive a Facebook or Instagram hack on your business.
Now, first things first, this is not an internet security episode. I’m not an internet security expert. I’m actually going to share the things that you can’t Google, that nobody tells you and share the insider things that we learned. Honestly, the hard lessons, some of them we did well, some of them we failed on so that if this ever happens to you,
that you know how to survive it. And also you are going to walk away with four things that I recommend you do immediately right now, because the statement that it will never happen to me is totally not true. I’m so sorry. Especially as we move towards an election, there’s always an increase in internet hackers. And I don’t know about you, but there’s just been so many instances with other businesses that I have heard about in the last six months with COVID and way too many bad people with way too much time on their hands hacking business accounts.
So I know it isn’t just me and I don’t want it to be you. So this episode is for every business who operates on Facebook and on Instagram, because those famous last words, it will never happen to me are only said up until the point that you wake up, like I did, and your accounts are totally gone. Not only that you’re going to hear what happened to my hardware.
I’m just going to honestly download the whole story for you. It is a nightmare, but it’s an eyes wide open thing. And I think that other businesses should know what can happen. I wish somebody had really laid it out there for me, like I’m going to do for you. So, you know, I understand that as a business owner, you spend a lot of time on these resources on Facebook and Instagram.
You post things, you go live, you hunt for the best imagery and source, the best pictures. You comment with others, you research hashtags, you produce IgE TV videos, and you probably have spent way many hours figuring out what filter is the right one to go with your brand or you’ve paid somebody else to do that. So you’ve invested time and you’ve invested money in growing your Facebook and Instagram presence as you should.
I mean, these are necessary evils, and they’re a great way to attract your ideal audience and increase your exposure and establish your expertise as a business right up until the moment when they’re wiped out. And this usually happens with zero communication from Facebook, no opportunity to submit a support ticket or reclaim your account. And frankly, nobody is going to talk to you.
It Facebook, we all know that that nobody cares about you or me enough to get on the phone. They really could give a shit about your brand and your business. And it doesn’t even matter how much money you have spent like us over the years in Facebook ads, because they have enough money. They’ll be just fine without yours. You mean nothing to them.
And if somebody takes offense to that listening, great, maybe Facebook will call me now, anyway, in this episode, I’m going to share with you exactly what happened to our company, the steps that we had to go through to regain access. And frankly, what happens when you have to start your whole entire brand and your Facebook account from scratch it.
The recording of this episode, I think that I have a whole 56 followers on my brand new Instagram account, because that’s the way the ball bounces, by the way you can cruise over and follow me at, at April beach life. I would love it if you’d follow me, but that’s the way it is right now. So let’s go ahead and dive into this show at the end of the show,
you’re going to know how to protect and preserve your content, how to control what is absolutely out of control through settings in your Facebook business page manager and how your company can bounce back after you are hacked in many of the resources will all be found that I’m sharing on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 86. Okay. Let’s dive in.<inaudible> Okay.
So let me give you a rundown, just kind of a timeline leading up to this episode. Last November, we had some Facebook hacking instances where it says somebody’s unauthorized logged into our account, and of course we’ve done everything religiously that Facebook has said, the two factor authentication, the separate authentication app. I even have lists of reclaim codes written down by hand in my desk drawer,
everything you can possibly do, according to what Facebook tells you to do, to keep your account secure. We have done them to the hilt. And even with that, we had a hacking instance that lasted eight weeks between November and December last year, where we were unable to comment on our own posts. So if somebody commented to us, we couldn’t comment back.
And we had 11 different times where we were locked out of making any comments to our followers, or really connecting with our followers over a period of 24 hours. So these 11, 24 hour periods lasted over over a term of two months. That was the worst thing in the world to me. And I felt terrible because people that are used to connecting with us and just chatting back and forth,
they couldn’t hear anything from us and they didn’t know why. And so I thought that was like the end of the world. Well little did I know with the rest of the joy that 2020 has brought us, it has only gotten worse in may of 2020. Our Facebook ads account was hacked. And within a period of a couple of hours, somebody had actually started running ads for,
I believe it was a solar panel company and they look totally legit on our ads manager account. And I don’t even know who is getting the money for this. Cause I was paying Facebook. I was getting charged like $1,700 over a period of a couple of hours for running what looked like solar panel ads. Again, the logic behind that the money was going to Facebook.
So nobody was actually making money. It just sounds like a cruel and unusual punishment thing to do to a business owner with somebody that had way too much time on their hands. And so that happened in may and we had open tickets, unfortunately because of that, our entire ads manager count was shut down. Facebook deemed that even after all of the years of all of the ad spend basically all the money that we had paid them to run ads for years and years,
being a faithful business customer that they didn’t want to deal with having to clean out our account from hackers. And so they totally shut down our Facebook business ads account. And if you’re in digital marketing, you know, that means that we also lost all of our pixel traction. So that means all of our pixels, all of the data, all of the tracking that we had done in all of our website pages for all of the people who’ve responded to our ads,
our ability to rerun and retarget ads to our warm audience, everything was lost and wiped out. And that was in may of 2020. I also thought that was by far the worst thing on earth that could happen. And we created new pixels starting from scratch. Then on June 12th at 3:42 AM an email came to my phone that our account had been breached with an authorized access.
And I woke up that morning to no personal Facebook page and no personal Instagram account and no business Facebook page for my other company. So all of the accounts that were connected to one email address worked totally wiped off the pace of the planet. It wasn’t like there were shut down and had to reset the password. They were gone completely wiped off the face of the earth.
And so I, like I had learned to do unfortunately so many times before reached out to Facebook and because I technically in their eyes had to zero Facebook account, like I had never existed. Couldn’t even open a Facebook support ticket. So being the crafty person that I was trying to be and desperately figure out how to regain control of my business and personal Facebook accounts,
I was emailing back to Facebook through my other email address, to the open support ticket that was still open regarding the shutdown of my ads account. Previously. I had somebody I’m so excited. I had somebody I could email. Well, I very soon learned that this person also did not give a shit about me. And because what I was emailing about had nothing to do with actually the first ticket number with shutting down the ads account that this person was not willing to help me and that I needed to open a new support ticket.
Well, unfortunately, Facebook. So you think it’s bad already. Facebook blocked all of our devices. Okay. So in their desire to protect themself, I’m giving them the benefit of the doubt. They blocked somehow some way my cell phone, my brand new iPhone 11, not a cheap phone and even online, I could not access the accounts. I tried to get the text number to be sent to me.
It was gone. You guys, not even like let’s reclaim and refresh this account totally gone. And just like taking a minute here and sharing this story with you. At this point, I was not thinking about my business. I was thinking about the comments that my dad had made to me on my personal Facebook page and commenting on his grandkids stuff. And my dad died four years ago and loving going back and reading his comments on my Facebook page.
I was thinking about the morning things that I get to wake up to of your memories from eight years ago, when my kids were babies and playing with bubbles in the backyard, or sitting in the couch, watching Mickey mouse with an umbrella over their head, those are the things that I lost. And so just separating this a minute here, we’re going to talk about the business loss,
but the magnitude of the devastation of memories that were totally wiped off the face of the earth and Facebook could care less has been absolutely just a tragedy for me personally, as a daughter, as a mother. And so picked up my big girl, britches got back to work, and I will tell you that was June 11th. We did not that regain access to Instagram because they also shut down the Instagram account.
Not only the Instagram account, I couldn’t even log into our other Instagram accounts from my mobile phone. We did not regain access to that until last night. And the recording of this, that was July 22nd, it’s 7:16 PM. So if you’re following along with this terrible nightmare, what I’m sharing is that somehow some way Facebook blocked my cell phone and I couldn’t even log into my other Instagram accounts.
I tried a VPN. I spent four hours on the phone with Apple. I spent two hours in the Apple store, which was a miracle because with Kobe, they’re only supposed to give me 15 minutes. I have, I spent massive time trying to at least control our other Instagram accounts. For example, this podcast account at Sweetlife podcast, couldn’t even log into this count online.
And somehow some way it was told to me that Facebook had blew the serial number on the motherboard of my iPhone somehow some way. And I had to bite the bullet and buy a new iPhone. So it has clearly been a nightmare and all of our communities we’re on Facebook, everything. So I’m recording this episode for you to give you four different ways that you can not only safeguard your account,
but four different ways that you can bounce back. Like we are after it happens, because no matter what, it will be a total nightmare for you. However, there are some strategic things you need to be doing in your business in order to protect yourself, both on the personal side and on the business side. So I’m going to share these four safeguards for you.
And then I have resources for you in the show notes. So safeguard number one, we have talked about this on the show before you need to make sure that your email list, your list of leads and clients and content does not solely live on Facebook or Instagram or any other social media platform for that matter. So that means you need to grow your email list.
Don’t allow Facebook and Instagram to completely control your ability to communicate with your followers. So you need to be getting the names and email addresses of your followers. At this point in time, you don’t even have to think of anything crafty. You can put a post out there and saying, Hey, I heard Facebook and Instagram accounts are getting hacked all the time.
And I don’t want to lose contact with you guys. If you want to be put on our emergency email list, sign up here. I wish I had done that. I should have done that. Knowing how many times we had been getting hacked, although I never dreamed that that would happen and we’d clearly lose everything. So safeguard number one is to build your email list in a separate email marketing manager that you own so that you never lose connection.
So if you have to start from scratch with your accounts, like we have to do, you can email your list and say, Hey, follow us at our new account. Safeguard. Number two, on your Facebook business page, you should have multiple administrators. I did have multiple administrators on my Facebook ads account. Those people that ran our Facebook ads for us,
but we only had one primary administrator on my Facebook business page. Therefore, if you go to Facebook right now in search April beach, you will see my page and I have no control over it. There’s my face. There’s our logo. Nothing. It’s just going to live there forever. And when you see me not posting again, it isn’t because I suck at creating content.
It’s because we have no control over that. So on your Facebook business page, make sure that you have multiple administrators. So if you have an assistant, you have somebody that works with you. I don’t care if you have a friend, make them an administrator on your Facebook business page and make sure this person doesn’t share the same IP addresses you. So they’re not within your own home.
So if your wifi gets hacked, both of you guys, aren’t totally locked out, safe guard. Number three, this is kind of a crafty one. We have this, and I’m really grateful. This is a great reason to have a custom hashtag for your business. So we have a custom hashtag two of them. Actually, one of them is sweet life podcast.
So anytime somebody is looking for one of our episodes, whether it’s on Instagram or on LinkedIn, they follow our hashtag, which is sweet life podcast. And all of our stuff pops up. So because we have a custom hashtag, even with our new Instagram account, I can keep reposting to that same hashtag in our followers that know like, and trust that we’re going to keep giving content can keep getting content from us and they can see the connections to our new account.
So this is a great reason why you should have a custom hashtag that is only your company’s hashtag, then nobody else can take from you. And it doesn’t matter what account you’re posting from. It’s your hashtag. And you can even go back in paying and reconnect with those followers that are following your hashtag, as they’ve commented on it in the past. Now,
if you lose your account, like we did, all of your posts are actually going to be gone. But as you go back and you post more content with that, hashtag people that follow that hashtag are going to see it and then safe card, number four, this is going to take you a little bit of time. Everything else you can do.
Yeah. This is gonna take you a bit of time. Should have this done. Anyway, you need to have this to grow and scale your company to multiple six to seven figures. This is one of those standard operating procedures that you should have rolling anyway. Okay. This is cute. Seeing your content clearly and cleanly organized somewhere else. So everything you post on your social media platforms should also live in a Google drive or in a Dropbox.
We keep everything in Dropbox. So all of the content that we post for every single podcast episode and all the content, right, that I have posted in the past on my Instagram account, that is no longer alive. We have any different account other than that platform. So rather than recreating all the content from scratch, we get to simply go and copy and paste.
A lot of that content, obviously there’ll need to be some editing and updating to what’s pertinent and to make sure it’s relevant right now, but we have that content did live somewhere else. And so if you don’t have a system yet for organizing and archiving your content, you need to have one. It’s also a great way to realize what you’ve created as a business owner and stop always creating new things.
You can start repurposing some of the content that you might’ve posted two years ago, especially if it is still relevant and pertinent, you don’t always have to start from scratch. As a matter of fact, that is not a good idea to always start from scratch. And so those are your safeguard tips and you know, some of these things we did really well.
Again, we have a separate email list. That’s something that we teach you guys about all the time here on this show. I did not have multiple admins on my business page that I lost that was shut down. And I did not have multiple admins on my April beach business page. I went wrong there. I had multiple admins on my business ads account,
but not on the business account. Safeguard number three is having a custom hashtag and you guys can follow us at our custom hashtag at Sweetlife podcasts. We would love it if you did. Now, we’re literally starting from scratch and you’ll go over and you’ll follow us on our podcast account on Instagram. And it’s like, there’s 200 followers and I would love it.
If you’d follow us over there. The hashtag for that is sweet life podcast. You need to have your own custom hashtag, so you can always reclaim and connect and talk directly to your audience. And then safeguard number four is to keep your content cleanly organized and archived someplace else. So you are not totally relying on social media platforms to how is your content?
Another thing that you can use is you can use a social media scheduler like we do. We really love buffer. I know their strep, sprout, social and different social media schedulers. You can go back and see what’s already been posted and copy and pasted out of there, but that’s again, relying on another social platform in a sense. So the safest place for it is going to be in a Dropbox business account or something like that.
So thank you so much for listening to this episode. I hope you guys found this informative. The purpose of this show is to set you up for success in the event of failure. And I don’t want anybody to have to go what we went through since this happened. We now have a new business community. If you haven’t joined us yet, we have created a new custom business networking app,
and we’ve built that completely on a brand new app platform that is exclusive to us called mighty hosts. We love them. We’re very happy and you can join our new business community. So Facebook community is gone. New business community app is here by visiting Sweetlife community.com. We’d love to have you joined us over there and I’m always delivering face to face. As far as virtually goes,
business development strategies, and you get tons of business training and coaching, and you can network with other companies and grow your own business there too. So join us over@sweetlifecommunity.com and all the show notes. And the resources we talked about here will be found in the show notes by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 86. This was how to survive Facebook or Instagram hack on your business and start from scratch without totally starting from scratch.
Again. I really hope it doesn’t happen to you, but if it does, I hope this episode has caught you first and you don’t have to live through the nightmare that I did, right? You guys, I hope you have a great week next week. We’re diving into all about how to build your first funnel and dive into using digital marketing to grow.
I’ll talk to you again soon. Bye for now.

Episode 167: Online Business Launch Tips and Revenue Streams – with April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Online Business Pre-Launch Checklist

COVID-19 Small Business Resource Center

Who This Episode is Great For:

  • Consultants, Coaches and Service Providers who are looking to expand your business online
  • You’re looking for clear steps to make your business transition to online
  • You’re interested in launching 1-1 coaching services virtually


This episode is important to help save you time. I meet a lot of business owners who’ve worked hard to build the wrong kind of business. This is an unfiltered episode that lays out some tough love and inspiration to help you launch your online business the right way including; how you’ll make money, how you’ll serve your clients online, and launching products that people love. 
This show also helps you define your perfect day routine and choose the best online business that aligns with your plans because having an online business does not mean you will be working less.
I also give specific recommendations of ideas of online courses, membership sites and other things you could consider to add to your offering menu and why it’s important to master one first. Why you can’t set it and forget it and that you need to have an active growth plan, as well as the truth about the hard work it takes to build your business online. 


  1. How to choose the right kinds of online services, products, and revenue streams
  2. The two types of popular online courses people buy
  3. What a membership site is and why you might want to launch one 
  4. Important online relationships you’ll need to build 
  5. How to stand out online 

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hi there. Episode number 167 of The Sweet Life Entrepreneur in Business Podcast I’m April Beach and we are in Week two here at my house that the recording of this were actually on date number four of Corona virus locked down. My boys are restless and this is a very strange and surreal time. And there’s a lot of bad news out there, a lot of scary things that are being talked about.
And so here, the Sweet Life Company and on the podcast, we are focusing in on all of the positives, the positives from a business standpoint and the positives from a personal standpoint. There is beauty from the ashes. There’s a silver lining to this, and so that’s what we’re going to talk about here on today’s show and is a business. We’re really striving to focus on those things also, it puts us in a very unique situation because my company’s expertise is developing online businesses. The podcast is dedicated towards small businesses and entrepreneurs who are looking to launch your service is and grow your company online in.
So there is certainly a silver lining in this, that this particular podcast is strategically designed to be pouring into you as an entrepreneur right now in the state of the world that we’re in. So I hope this show is a blessing to you. And I hope that you use the free tools and business strategies that we have here to grow your business online because there has never been a more important time to do that. If you and I don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach, and I’m super glad that you’re here.
You can get to know me more by cruising over to sweet life co dot com. In the meantime, this is what you can expect on today’s episode. We’re diving in, and I’m actually giving you a pre online business launch checklist that goes along with the teachings I have on today’s show. The idea behind this is that many of you who may have not launched your existing business or brought a new business online before are in the process of doing it in I know that there is a rush to get online.
I understand the importance. I have kids, I have a home. I have people that I love to take care of this well, it’s a very scary and surreal time right now that’s happening in the world until I understand that there is a rush Tau launch your business online. With that being said, it’s my intention to make sure that as you bring your business online, you’re doing it mindfully in a very smart way that works with your life, aligns with your profit plan and establishes your business in your brand as the leader.
So on today’s show, you’re going to get the business training, and I have a complete online business pre launch checklist for you to download. You can cruise over to the show Notes for this, which are found at Sweet Life podcast dot com forward slash 167 On top of that, I have also partnered with my good friend, who’s also been a podcast guest here on the show back in 2019. Elizabeth McFadden Elizabeth is the cofounder of Novella Brand House out of Kansas City, and they are the ultimate branding and marketing Ninjas,
Sweet Life Company. My business and this podcast, a novella brand house, have partnered that we have created a completely free cove in 19 small business resource center that I want to make sure that you guys know about You can go right away to sweet life. Coat dot com Ford slash cove It small business. Now I know that you might be busy and maybe not able to write that down. And so I will make sure that the link to the Free Cove in 19 Small Business Marketing, an online business development resource center,
is available to you in the show notes again. So the on Lee you’re all you need to remember is cruising over to sweet life. Podcast dot com ford slash 1 67 This resource and the online business prelaunch checklist are all totally free for you, and we’re talking marketing training’s how to create an online content counter and things that both of our companies actually usually charge a lot of money for. We’ve made them all free to you to grab at this cove. It Small business resource center again cruise over to the sweet life podcast website,
and we’ll make sure that we’re getting those in your hands. Okay. On today’s show, we are specifically talking about four things you should know before launching your online business. Online businesses are the new frontier of entrepreneurship. We all know that I’m not telling you something you don’t know. But how are you going to build your online business in a way that it’s still gonna work with your family in a way that you feel like you are doing a good job strategically positioning yourself with what other online businesses air doing and meaning your client’s needs?
Those are a lot of things to think about watching your online business. It’s very different than just launching your business when you get into the point of launching the online part of your business or online service is there are quite a few different things that you should be thinking about ahead of time so that you don’t waste your time and we’re gonna talk about four of those things that you should be thinking about ahead of time on this episode. So if you’re new here, this is the drill. If you are one of my fans,
it’s here all the time in my followers again. I appreciate you so much. So just bear with me while I go through this because I want to make sure this is really great use of your time. If you’re new to the podcast, I cover three questions in the beginning. So you know if this is a great use of your time. Number one. Who is this Episode four Number two. Why is this important? And Number three, what can you expect to discover or learn? So here are the answers to those questions.
Number one This episodes is for coaches, consultants and service providers who are looking to expand your business online. This means that you’re looking for where to start in clear steps of what you should do first before you make that transition that jumped online. This is also for you if you really have not had a one on one in person service business before, but you want to get into launching an online business or online coaching or consulting service is why is this important thing is important so you don’t jump in blindly because if you don’t do your homework and you don’t know the answers or the thoughts and strategies that I’m gonna bring forward in these four different things I want you to be aware of.
Then you are gonna waste your time. And time is money. So don’t waste your money. You can expect that I’m going to download you on these four different areas and topics that I want you to be aware of.
And I’m going to be really honest. This is going to be pretty unfiltered. And I’m just gonna lay it out there and tell you exactly what I want you to be aware of with each one of these four points.
So there’s gonna be a little bit of tough love in here, and then there’s going to be hopefully a lot of inspiration and learning from some of my mistakes.
I’m gonna share those with you and a really quick note of you are one of my established listeners. You know that I tackled the episodes by phase of business you’re in.
So this particular episode is for those of you who are in my lifestyle. Entrepreneur roadmap phases one and two.
If you’re interested in taking a quiz to find out where you are simply visit sweet life co dot com aboard slash Quiz.
So you want to launch an online business, join the club. Here are four things that I would like you to be aware of.
First number one. How are you gonna make money? You need to know your business model. And what will your revenue streams be?
What will they look like? How are you gonna bring revenue into your new online business? So I’m gonna give you a sample of different types of revenue streams that you can consider for your business and break them up into three different categories to help you understand and kind of wrap your head around this a little bit more.
So the first revenue stream is selling service is or selling digital products. So if you’re a coach or a consultant,
this could look like creating downloads or templates to be sold. Maybe you want to create a workbook to be sold or a planner.
There are a lot of entrepreneurs that are creating these in really amazing planners for other entrepreneurs. I love them.
I’m such a sucker for those. They’re making great money doing it. Their specialty is creating planners. So that is certainly one area If your coach,
our consultants and you want to make money through digital products. If you’re a service provider and you want an online business than you could bring in revenue by creating graphic design result based products,
whether it’s logo design or PDF design or slide design, you also could be doing ah website design and anything that the delivery of the product is digital.
The results of what you’re creating is also a digital result. So those were two examples of how you could make money with your new expanding on my business through digital products.
Granted, there are so many others you can do social media design. Do you have the list goes on and on,
depending on what your specialty is, You can also consider creating beautiful, like signs and paintings and different things to be sold on etc.
And it’s still considered an online digital business. So I just wanted to mention some of those again. If you’re a coach or a service provider consultant than digital products is,
a revenue stream would look like downloads, workbooks, graphic design, Web design, anything that the result is digital based or a settling of that service or product is digital rather than meeting with somebody one on one and face to face or selling it like an art and craft show or something.
A second example of how to make money online is specifically for those of you guys who are coaches, teachers or consultants,
and these would be to launch an online course or perhaps to offer instruction through teaching webinars. Now there are two different types of online courses that you can consider watching,
and we are going to dive too deep into these because I don’t want to dump truck you with too much information.
But there are basically two different types of online courses. One is known as Evergreen, and that is the type of course that you would create and you’d pre record and it would be available all the time.
Anybody conjoining it, it’s on demand. They could just jump into your course whenever they find you and whenever they’re ready.
And then the other type, of course, is one that’s more of an open enclosed car course. So it is only open a couple times a year,
if that, and there’s a lot of marketing a lot of hype around when you open up the list for people to join that.
And then there’s a very hard deadline for when you close the doors to that course. And then the course begins and everybody works together through the course,
usually at the same pace. Those are two different types of options you can consider as faras only courses you also might want to consider.
Teaching live in live is a great way to connect with people. There’s so many different ways to offer live training’s.
You can do live webinars through like Zoom or go to Webinar. You can also do live like Facebook,
Live Training’s within a closed private community. And then the third opportunity for you to consider is like a membership site or an association.
A membership site is a little different than an online course, because a membership site is something where you need to make sure that you’re constantly nurturing your members.
There are always people joining and some people coming in. There’s kind of this ebb and flow off the members that come in and out of your community,
so it’s always important to be creating at least like one new training in a month for them, or,
you know, they have perhaps a core content that they come into. And then maybe you could even charge more and do a smaller upgrade for them To get the newest latest training,
you could have membership levels. There’s so many different things to consider with the membership site, but it is a little bit different than just a straight cut and dry online course.
It doesn’t have that beginning point in that completion point. As an online course, Teso membership site is something that’s a bit longer of a commitment for you.
So I just want you to be aware of that. And the same is true of about creating an association because you have members in your association that you need to nurture and you need to keep supporting.
So going back to question number one, you need to know how you’re gonna make money, and I want you to fully investigate every single one of the opportunities.
But I also want you to consider going back to that vision. What is your vision for your business?
What does an Every day we could look like owning and running your business. Do you want to have more contact with your clients?
Is something like a membership site where you’re constantly connecting with them in meeting with them and having relationships with them?
Is that something that that you like? Word. Are you thinking maybe like an online course? You can create more passive income that you can create more income that you work really hard in.
I am going to tell you that launching online courses a lot of work. It’s worth it, but it’s a lot of work,
you guys, and so you know you’re gonna do all that work up front. And then there’s also the marketing in the list building that goes around that.
But is that something that’s more your style? You know, I personally I I love online courses because I don’t have the capacity based on how I designed my life to constantly be in a membership site all the time.
But then, of course, I make up for that because I have a really great online Facebook community.
So I do get to have those relationships that I want, and they just look different than they would with a full blown membership site.
So there are so many options for you. I wanted to give you a brief overview of each one because you do need to make a choice.
And once you make a choice, please start with one master, one of them. First, I would not go out wanting the launcher on light business with trying to do an online course and a membership site and creating a downloadable digital product.
Yes, I want you to have multiple streams of revenue, but you do need to do one of them well in.
So in order to do things well, I want you to make sure that you’re really just having opportunity.
Given yourself that opportunity to focus on one of them at a time. Okay, The second thing I want you to be aware of before you launching your online business is how much you’re going to be working online Does not mean that you are working less.
If you thought that or if anybody told you that, then they’re not telling you the truth. Yes,
you can make your own schedule. Yes, you can choose to only work 20 hours a week, but when you’re first getting your business started and you’re developing your online courses and programs and materials and service is and everything that you’re gonna be offering,
including your brand and making yourself visible to your ideal clients. It is a lot of work, you guys,
so if you launch it, they won’t come. I have so many clients that are like, Oh,
I can’t wait. I, you know, work somewhere, and I can’t wait to just finally launch my website or I can’t wait to just,
you know, finally get my course up and running. And then it’s like crickets. So I want you to be aware of the fact that it takes a lot more than just showing up on the Web in order to make money online.
Online has more moving parts than you’re in person business. And as you get into this, you’re gonna discover it.
So let’s make sure you have a plan for how you’re gonna manage that. Moving parts in your online business look different,
though, than they would if you’re meeting with somebody one on one and giving them nutrition, coaching or if you’re a doula and your meeting with them one on one,
and in helping them prepare for their baby that it looks a lot different when you move your business online,
your work time shifts. So it’s shifts in that you aren’t necessarily working in your business so much. But the amount of time you’re working on your business is actually going to increase,
And this is gonna look like new types of relationships that you need to build. You’re not gonna have an opportunity as much to connect with people face to face and build those relationships.
So the relationships that you are now gonna build our very intentional and sadly, they take a little bit longer to take root because you’re not seeing somebody face to face.
And that’s obviously what’s gonna happen when you weren’t physically with somebody is building that relationship. In that trust,
it’s going to take a little bit longer. And these relationships, certain referring to are not only to your new clients but to new business colleagues and affiliates and influencers.
So when you launch this online business after your website is up because I want youto have your your brand represented well,
before you start reaching out in saying you know what you do to these potential clients. I want to make sure that you’re at least your splash pages up,
and then you haven’t opt in and your brand is is well represented. You don’t get a second chance to make that first impression.
Then we need to dig into the relationship building inside. So you’re gonna build intentional relationships with your fans and with your new online friends.
And these relationships take work, and they take time. Now, I’m not saying that you’re not gonna have face to face contact,
and we’ll talk about that in a second. But you have to create this optimal lead magnets to attract people to you.
And then after you’ve created that there is a period of time and work that you are gonna need to put in to get your information in front of your ideal audience in order to grow your list and to grow your amount of followers in one of the most powerful ways to do this is to get other businesses and other influencers to tell people about your business.
But one of the ways to get other businesses and other influencers to tell people about your business is develop relationships with them in those relationships take time,
they take trust and they take time. So if you’re working backwards, it looks like launching your business,
being clear about what you’re offering and then connecting with other people that you may need to mentor you to help guide you through continuing,
develop your relationship and then also putting your business out there so that others can share your business with their fans in their followers.
And these things do take time. They take time in the number of hours that you will need to work each week because the more you work,
I will say the more that you get done, that might not sound very popular. But the more time you put in,
the more ground you’re gonna cover, it also means that the summary is basically me saying when you launch your Web site,
you aren’t just going to be plowed over with people dying to join your online course. That is a lie.
That’s not gonna happen. You have to grow your list and grow your influence and grow your brand. The only thing I want you to know about online businesses is that you can’t stop connecting with people,
face to face. I told you I’d be honest with you. And so here this is me being honest.
I suck it connecting with people face to face. I say that online business and working at home gets lonely and sometimes that it does,
but not very often to me. I’m actually pretty good here in my office and then going to the gym in the morning and seeing my very small circle of friends.
I don’t need more than that. My body, my mind doesn’t need more than that. However, I’ve really learned in the last two years that my creativity does,
and that been ordered to continue bringing my business to the place that I want to bring it to. I need to surround myself with other people that I allow to speak into my business and speak to me and mentor me and guide me.
And really, those types of relationships are built best by that face to face connection. I might meet them through a digital online mastermind or an online community or an online Facebook group.
But in order to really facilitate those relationships, I need to start taking the time to invest in being with them face to face.
And I have started to do that in the past two years. And what’s happened to me professionally in my development and in my business is night and day from all of the years that I was like in the trenches of being in my office by myself.
So I just want to be honest with you and tell you that it is important. It’s a new development for me in the last couple of years.
How important that is in that even though you are going to launch your online business, you still need to develop these face to face relationships with mentors and influencers and people that you will allow to come around you as a community and speak into your life and into your business.
Okay, Number three, how are you going to master the technology? You guys have heard me say I kill technology over and over again,
and I totally d’oh, but I want you to have my philosophy. I am prepared that I am not going to be scared.
That is my philosophy. Be prepared to not be scared for technology and is it going to die? And it’s something gonna go wrong like the 1st 5 times.
Yeah, totally. So I kind of set my bar pretty low when I get in there. And I learned a new software.
I am going to suck at it and it’s not gonna work right? And so there I’m gonna have those phone calls where I’m calling my husband or my friends and just saying I’m killing this.
I can’t do it. And I’m to the place, and I want you to be at the place where you need to hire somebody to do the tech stuff for you.
You don’t have to be a tech wizard to have an online business Hire help Hire it out. If you aren’t in place yet where you can’t afford to hire it out yet.
Then you’re gonna have to, you know, figure it out. But the reality is, is be prepared that you’re not going to be scared.
You’re gonna master the technology. And so you have to set aside the time to tackle that learning curve to master the technology.
In order to master your technology, I want you to do your research and I want you to choose the right website platform before you ever launch.
Don’t launch because a weekly site is cheap. Don’t choose Oh squarespace site because they have really beautiful templates and you can do it yourself.
And honestly, don’t even choose a WordPress site because you’ve heard me say on here, I would totally recommend one with a wordpress dot org’s site.
That is not why I want you to choose a site. I want you to sit down, go back to number one,
figure out what you’re going to be delivering and how you’re gonna be delivering it, whether it’s in courses or products.
And take a look at the big picture of what you’d like to deliver online and then choose the best website platform that is going to deliver you the capabilities to do that.
That is step number one. The second thing I want you to know is technology is becoming more and more simple every day.
We have online videos. They have amazing technical support. So if you’re struggling with something like lead pages or active campaign or convert kit,
call them and ask them and choose the technology based on the support and the help that you need. It doesn’t have to be all about all the bells and whistles.
The most expensive one isn’t the best one for you necessarily. So go with what you can do. Because if you can’t do it and you can’t master,
it is not gonna do you any good anyway, right? So choose the technology that if you have to master it yourself,
then you could master well in the beginning. And then once you have an opportunity, go with a technology support person.
Attacked Guru, one of those wonderful people that just loves to master in mold technology, toe work perfectly to your benefit.
And the some of that I’m just telling you, don’t let the technology scare you. Is it going to be easy?
No, it’s not gonna be easy. Is it worth it? Yes, it’s totally worth it. And you can do it.
I’m gonna put a link in here to the technology that I use in the software that I use to house my website.
I’ve gone through so many different online course software because I’ve had online courses since 2008 on, and so it really has been a long journey of transitioning through multiple different software options I’m in order for me to find the one that I love now on the one that works for me.
Now, you now need to find what works for you and number four. You need to know how to stand out.
So the fourth thing I want you to know before you launch your on my business is how you will stand out.
And here are my suggestions for you. The first thing is to be your brand. You have to be your brand.
Not everybody’s gonna like you. And you shouldn’t try to be somebody else. This is something that is incredibly easier said than done.
You absolutely deserve an opportunity to build a business. That is the representation of the brand that you want to put forth and your ideal clients.
Because you’re in a perfect world developing your brand for her, for that ideal person. She is gonna love it,
but everybody else might not. And that is okay. I don’t want you to be afraid to niche down.
I don’t want you to be afraid that you are narrowing your audience. I want you to know in your heart who you serve specifically and I want you to be that branch.
And let me tell you a little quick story. An example of this One of the first areas of consulting that I started specializing in was the maternity industry.
And I became an expert at launching service and consulting business in maternity industry. So I was an expert at launching businesses for Obi Joan’s in maternity concierge and of the,
you know, private our ends in anybody in the maternity field because I was so niche specific. I never advertised.
I never did. Google AdWords high never, ever spent a dime marketing my business, and it was always a constant stream of income because it was so clear on who I served in what results that they would expect was I afraid that I wasn’t going to meet the needs of somebody who wanted to do something else back in 2008?
Absolutely not. I was totally dead set on serving only the maternity industry and coaching and launching those businesses.
So there is power. There’s massive power in niche ing down. Now my niche is obviously changed. I launched coaches,
consultants and service providers who want to reach that 20 hour work week business model. That’s what I do.
That’s not what you need for me. That’s okay, but that’s what I do. I want you to get that specific as well.
Don’t be afraid to be authentic. And don’t try to please everybody. And then the other thing I just want to make sure that you’re aware of is that you need to be consistent.
You need to be consistently in front of your audience, often being online. There is a footprint that will be there forever.
People can look back and see how often you posted when you posted what you posted, what you were seeing on your block.
So you have to create a plan in which you are going to be consistently showing up. It doesn’t mean you have to show up every day,
and it doesn’t mean it even has to be every week. Just start consistently. If you can only blogged once a month,
then commit to blogged once a month. If you think you can do it twice a month and then commit to do it twice a month but don’t fail at that,
that’s when we get into misrepresenting your brand and people will question your trust and whether or not your business they want to work with subconsciously because of the fact that you weren’t consistently in front of them.
So I just want to be honest with you about the fact that it’s going to take consistent communication with your audience for you to prove that you want to serve them and for them to notice you,
especially with all of the images in all of the things that are being thrown at them. Currently four online businesses,
they’re getting so many messages, so many images, so many different things, air coming at them all at once.
So that’s what it takes. And I wanted to be up front with us because so many of you guys are ready to take that jump,
and it’s so amazing. This is what you have worked for it. This is what you’ve wants your business and taken your ideas and brought them forward for to this point where you get to now share it with the world.
So let’s make sure that you’re going into with eyes wide open again. What are we going over first thing is,
how are you gonna make money? How are you going to make money? You can do multiple different streams of income.
But let’s make sure that you’re picking the one that you want to start with first and that you are putting out a great product number to know how much time you’re gonna be working.
When you’re first getting started, you are not gonna be working less hours. It takes awhile to build the business to the point where you can scale it back to that 20 hour work week.
That’s the truth. Launching and growing and scaling your business is a journey Number three. Be prepared to not be scared by technology.
Technology does not have to scare you. It’s getting simpler. It’s getting easier to master. It’s getting better and you are ready for it.
You can do it. If I can do it, you can do it, I promise you. And number four,
I know how you’re going to stand out and be willing to be true to your brand. Don’t try to be somebody else.
Don’t try to compete with somebody else. Don’t try to serve everybody. Know who you serve. Why you serve that person?
What your purpose, What your mission is and how you are going to communicate it and then communicate it consistently.
All right, you guys, that’s a wrap. This was episode number 167 And so all of the resource is we mentioned the Corona Virus,
Small Business Resource Center and the business Launch Check list, including the online business software that we use so that you can copy and just check it out for yourself.
If you like it, you can find all those in the show notes for today’s show by visiting Suite Life podcast dot com forward slash 167 And before we go,
I just want to leave you with an encouraging word and then give our listener of the week a shout out.
We’re in a super uncertain time, a very surreal, very strange time where our faith is tested, where businesses air tested and where we grow.
We have been called into leadership. I believe you’ve been called into leadership. That’s why you’re listening to this show.
And so thank you so much for being here, and I just want to encourage you that we’re praying for you and as a community of global community of women business owners together we will pull through this.
Our hearts go out to the families who have lost our hearts, go out to people that are suffering and just together as a community.
Let’s just all agree to listen. Lift them up in prayer and support and everywhere we can, and that starts with helping our neighbor’s.
That starts with pouring into other businesses as you continue to grow yourself. Just like Henry Ford said. If everyone is moving forward together than success takes care of itself.
And before we leave, I want to give a shout out to Shannon Baker. She is the owner of socially savvy V A and the creator of the upcoming podcast called the More than Capable Mom.
Preneurs. Shannon’s an awesome Lister, owner of this show. She messages a ton back and forth with us on Instagram,
and we love her because she is a systems geek. So her company again is socially savvy. V.
A U confined her at socially savvy via on instagram and online Shannon. Thanks so much for listening to the show and creating Amazing service is the poor into businesses.
All right, you guys have a fantastic week. Be blessed. Be well, talk to you again soon
That’s all folks!

Episode 166: COVID-19 (Coronavirus) Business Opportunities and Tools To Work Remotely – with April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Episode Bonuses:

Need faster business growth? Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Who This Episode is Great For:

  • Local businesses affected by COVID-19
  • Small to midsize businesses ready to scale online
  • Entrepreneurs looking to grow their brand and ready to hyper-focus for big results


There’s no doubt that COVD-19 will affect how some businesses run. These are hard times, but on this show, we’re talking about great opportunities to grow and scale your business online. These strategies will help you continue to reach and serve your clients while developing new streams of income and developing a new business model that leads to more lifestyle and location freedom for small business owners. 


  1. How to meet with your clients virtually
  2. Software to work as a team online
  3. 5 things you can do right now to grow your brand from home
  4. How brick and mortar stores can sell products creatively

Resources Mentioned:

Calendar Software: 
Create an Online Community: 
Team Management Software:

SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Full Show Transcript:

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator A probe Age Hi there and welcome to the show Episode number 166 of The Sweet Life Entrepreneur A podcast and I’m April Beach Super glad to be talking to you. Not super glad to be talking about this topic, but we are finding the silver lining in today’s show. We’re actually going to dive in and talk about some really awesome business opportunities within the circumstance we find ourselves in with Cove in 19 across the world.
Now, if we don’t know each other yet in April. Beach, founder of the Sweet Life Company and Baby Plundering and host here of the Sweet Life Entrepeneur, a podcast have three awesome teenage boys at home. My husband’s an entrepreneur, and it’s always gonna be connected with you. I know we have a lot of new followers and new listeners, so thank you so much for tuning into this show. In a nutshell. I help women scale their business in a strategic way that helps you actually create lifestyle freedom while building a multi six figure company.
And so the strategy is that we talk about here on the show are to give you the steps to do that. This is a business development and business coaching podcast off the show. Notes from today’s episode can be found by visiting Suite Life Podcast Don con Okay, this is what you can expect on today’s show. We’re diving into business opportunities and how to find a silver lining with Kobe had 19. I am going to cover what to do if you are a local business, where you serve people face to face and you actually are used to seeing them physically.
Whether you have a brick and mortar store or you go to your clients, we’re talking about different ways that you can continue to grow your business and serve your clients. During this time, we are also going to cover different ways to connect with your team and continue to communicate, to continue to grow your business, and I’m going to dive into very specific strategies for those of you who are independent entrepreneurs and Sola preneurs Thio focus on things that you can be doing to grow yourself and your company during this time as well as we’re gonna wrap up the show.
And I’m gonna share with you personal things that you could be doing to grow as a professional. And then if you’re interested at the end of the show, I’m gonna be diving images, sharing some personal behind the scenes, just opening the front door of the beach house of our house and sharing with you some of the preparation that we do. Why we do certain preparation for certain emergency instances here in the beach house and also some scripture that I share with my kids to help sustain them and help them to feel strong and confident and at peace during really crazy times that we’re facing right now.
So we’re gonna dive into all the business strategy first. I’d love it. If you are interested, you’ll hang out with me and tell the end, and I’m gonna share with you behind the scenes here at the beach house. This particular show is perfect for you. If you do have an established business that serves clients face to face. If you go to work at a place where you’re working with other people and a co working space. If you are not really sure how to continue to do your job and actually grow your company when you can’t see people face to face and it’s for all of you,
Mom is out there just like me who are thinking big picture more than just about your business, about your life and your strategies and how to continue with the momentum that you’ve already experienced in 2020. If that is you, then stay tuned and very specifically for those of you guys who listen your faithful listeners, you know what phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur road map that you are in This particular show is tagged for every single phase of my life. So entrepreneur road map. Those were the five phases of business designed launch and growth.
If you aren’t sure where you are, you’re welcome to go back to the show notes and take a quiz, and you can find out what exact phase of business growth and development urine and receive very specific tips to grow your business. Beyond that point, we usually tag each episode here on the suite Life podcast. So you know whether or not a particular business. Training applies to where you are in business right now, so you aren’t getting distracted or sidetracked. So this particular episode, of course, does apply to every single phase of business development in my lifestyle.
Entrepreneur Road map For those of you guys that are wondering, Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. First things first. I want to talk to those guys with local businesses. So if you have a business where you serve somebody face to face, maybe you’re a realtor. If you’re a massage therapist, maybe you are a counselor or a trainer, and you are used to actually having people interact with you at locally. It doesn’t necessarily mean you have to have a brick and mortar store, but you’re used to interacting with people locally.
Here are some suggestions and some things that you could do to continue to serve your clients during this time. These are business development strategies that we talk about all the time with established business owners. So here’s a little background of this and why this isn’t a downer. This is a really cool strategic opportunity here. I actually work with businesses, local businesses to help them scale their company by offering virtual service is right. Now, you find yourself if you have done that yet in a place where you’re forced to do that.
But I want to let you know that what you might be forced to dio is a business strategy that we use all the time to help companies grow and actually make more money by offering a combination of local service is and virtual service is So here are some suggestions so that you can actually start tapping in already to the opportunities of online business scaling even if you didn’t want to. Okay, so the very first thing I recommend if you haven’t started this yet,
is start to create a calendar online. And I’m gonna give a lot of different links to online software you can use in our show notes.
So don’t worry about that. You can cruise over to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 1 66 and I will put the leaks of all of this software that I’m gonna recommend.
But the function I want you to do is to set up an online calendar if you don’t have one Yet for your business.
This gives people in your established clients an opportunity to book with you online. At that point in time,
meet with your clients virtually in a video call. This is how I work with clients all over the world.
And I have for over 12 years this is not something new. And if you haven’t tapped into this yet,
believe me, as soon as you start meeting with people, virtually you’re gonna love it. You might not even want to go back.
So start setting up virtual meetings. If you have a group of people that you’re used to serving, maybe you can’t show up to speak in an event.
Maybe you’re not able to teach a group of people like you had planned or to coach your host something that you had planned locally.
Maybe it’s a weekly class that you’ve done. I recommend that use. Do you think about creating a short term virtual online group again?
I’ll put all these links for you, but couple examples are a pop up Facebook group. You can create a Facebook community for his long or a short as you want.
Facebook does a really great job of helping you to connect with people and be able to serve them in Facebook communities.
In addition to Facebook, there are also other platforms, which I love. 1st 1 is disciple disciples,
an amazing on my platform where you can actually create in a community of your clients and customers and that you can connect with them and continue to serve them virtually an linked in Does a pretty good job with groups linked in is trying thio.
Continue to emphasize groups on Lincoln as well. If you find the majority of your customers are on LinkedIn,
then consider creating a short term linked in Group two. In fact, connect with your customers and provide virtual consulting and virtual service is to them.
Idea. Number three. Go back to old school phone calls. You guys, I think somewhere along the way we lost the power of getting on the phone with somebody.
It might not be a landline with a curly cord connected to the wall, but getting on the phone and connecting with your customers is a really powerful way to continue to serve them,
hear what they’re saying, understand their struggles and continue to coach them or consult them or provide service is to them if you have products that you sell.
So I’m talking to specifically to those of you guys who have a brick and mortar store with products, and you might even have a little bit of an online store.
But your primary business is having people walk through your door and see the face to face you can during this time when people might not be out in about as much as they have before.
How about featuring your products through live streams like a show and tell? How about showing up a couple of times a day from your business Facebook page from your instagram page and holding up one of the products talking about the products,
the features of the products? It’s like the Home Shopping network thing. This is kind of what I’m thinking about.
What an amazing way to talk to your customers about new items that just landed in your store that you know that they need anyway.
Show up on Facebook live, show up on Instagram and do a video about a product you can even give a virtual tour of your store,
and then I have a call to action for people that pick up the phone and call you in. Order that product over the phone.
That’s for those of you guys that don’t have a virtual store yet. We’re going old school. They can pick up the phone.
They can say, I really want that bag. It’s so cute and I can’t go in there and buy it.
But I love the way it looks. Can I please buy it from you? You can ring them up through your online.
Check out that you might have through PayPal or square up or any other online process it or that you have,
and you can drop it in the mail. To them, this is a great way to increase your social media falling to continue to build a relationship with your clients and to continue to sell products if you have a local store.
And, of course, if you have an online store and you haven’t really been able to have focused on that because you might have a local store as well.
Now is amazing opportunity to really emphasize your online store and to do some other natural interaction through social media to increase your sales again great places to do in these live product show and tells our Facebook instagram LinkedIn.
And if you have a high Twitter following, you might be able to get some traction as well on Twitter.
What a creative, fun, disruptive way to continue to be in your customers lives moving on. Four.
Those of you guys that have a team that you run you need to connect with your team. Here are some different platforms that you can use to continue to grow your team that will benefit you in the long run.
Even when you come back together locally, you can use slack. It’s a great way to chat with teams you can use.
Streak Streak is a plug in to Gmail for business that has your pipelines in your sails, and many people can tap into where customers are in the process,
virtually through email by using streak. There are also other platforms, like Facebook, workplace, Vasana and Trail.
Oh, and we’ll make sure that we put all the links to every single one of these platforms for you in the show notes.
So if you’re driving your car right now or you’re busy and you can’t write this down. Just cruise over to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 1 66 and I’ll make sure that we’re sharing all of these really simple and powerful software platforms that can help you grow your business,
serve your clients virtually and continue to connect with your team. Okay, now let’s switch gears a little bit.
Now I want to talk to those of you guys specifically who are already entrepreneurs. You may already work from home.
You may already have the laptop lifestyle Freedom. Congratulations to you If you do that, I can’t even tell you how grateful I am right now for the fact that I don’t have to leave the house.
It is just a feeling of peace for me. And so if you have that as well, I’m grateful for you.
If you do not have that, please hit me up here. You can send me a direct email to podcast at sweet life co dot com,
and we’re happy to work with you to establish that sort of a business model in your company as well.
For those of you guys who already have this business model, this is a really amazing time to start hyper focusing on what you need to be doing to continue to grow your personal and or your business brand.
So some things that I want to challenge you. So you listeners other. You guys know you Are you private Listening to this podcast for a long time?
You’re a coach or a service based consultant. You are really ready to continue to press in and grow your business.
You might even have had big plans of what you were supposed to be doing in your company over the next couple of months.
They might be getting a bit sidetracked Right now. I want to challenge you to do a couple of things to grow your business.
During this time. Number one I want to talk to those of you guys who specifically know you have a book in you.
Sometimes we need something disruptive like this in life to make us set aside the timeto outline or write that book.
If you’ve had a book inside you and you find this time that is inspiring for you to sit down and write it.
I want to encourage you to do that for those of you guys who’ve just been busy in the busy work of serving clients.
You know what I mean? You’re busy in the busy work. You’re constantly serving clients. You have very little time to actually work on business about men.
I want you to look at your weeks. Look, att. Some of the changes. Maybe you don’t have to be driving around as much taking your kids to all their activities.
Maybe. You know, you aren’t going out to go to Costco to go shopping groceries getting delivered to you.
The silver lining here. You’ve eyes. Is it? This situation with Cove in 19 is actually giving us the gift of time.
Time to be home. Time to think about what’s important time to be with those people We love time to focus on our health and time to focus on our business.
All right, So if you’ve been busy in the busy work with your business, I want to challenge you to sit down and start thinking about outlining new packages.
Higher level service is deeper offers with better results. I want you to sit down. Look at what you’re offering and consider bringing your business to the next level by creating new offers,
New packages. New service is your new programs. Take this time to brainstorm. Look at what people are buying and what they’re still challenged with and consider what you’re selling.
I also want to encourage you that if you haven’t yet, now is a really great time to set up a virtual coffee.
So we talked about this in last week’s podcast episode. Excuse me an episode number 1 64 We talked about this.
So two weeks ago we talked about how to connect with people in a deeper way locally, and one of them was to create a smaller mastermind in set up virtual coffee with business colleagues.
Do that now find five different people. If you don’t know them, reach out to them and Facebook groups or an instagram and ask them if they want to chill and have coffee with you.
Talk shop, help each other out, really create business relationships with people that understand what it’s like to be exclusively in online entrepreneur.
Another opportunity. I want to encourage you in. Have you been avoiding doing live streams because you’re not comfortable?
Now is the time to get comfortable. I want to encourage you to do be doing more lives, dreams to connect with your audience.
Maur to be sharing may be behind the scenes a little bit about what you’re doing in your company. Whatever that looks like to you,
now is a great time. Thio Face any fears you might have had of going on video and going live in really encouraging your connection with your audience virtually and then just a couple other pro tips for you.
Now is an amazing time to be pitching podcasts. Working on your media pack, working on your signature talk If you’ve been putting these things out,
if you’ve been putting out booking yourself on podcasts or booking yourself on stage is, now is the time to dive into that because there’s always you can continue to grow your business virtually,
and you are now given the gift of time. We’re looking again at the positives in this situation here.
I know there are a lot of really sad and terrible things happening right now, but I wanted to create a show where we’re looking at the positives here together.
Okay, now I want to give you some specific suggestions based on industry of different ways where you can utilize the opportunities here.
First of all, if you’re a therapist or a psychologist or a counselor or a life coach uses time to help your clients find peace and grow internally,
obviously you’re a psychologist or therapist. You already know that you’re the expert in that. Not me, but one of the things.
And there are some regulations of what you can do based on your licensing. One of things you could do is hosting a virtual group,
meeting or hosting a session where people can come together. They can share some concerns that they might be having together and really be able to talk about that.
You could do that in zoom meeting rooms, and you can do that and go to meeting and a bunch of other software we’re gonna give you.
The resource is to check out. But the point here is people are turning to you. People are looking to you because they need to find strengthen themselves and so looking at the situation,
and I think it’s okay to not continue business as usual, or at least to look at what else can be done to connect us in a time where we might felt isolated or disconnected,
and many people feel scared again. I know that there are certain regulations to that. For example, I called my child’s both my kids counselor who doesn’t have the ability to meet with them virtually because I didn’t want to bring my kids into the medical offices.
So I do know there are some regulations to that that based on the regulations you have, I just really wanna encourage those of you who can to be creating an opportunity to bring people together in that.
So it’s one business idea for you. If you’re in marketing, how can you help your clients create campaigns that work with Cove in 19?
I’m not saying make a joke of it, but you’re the creators. You guys are marketing geniuses. How can you help your clients actually start talking about the situation,
working with the situation, other than possibly ignoring it, pretending like it isn’t there? Or maybe that’s a terrible strategy.
Maybe they do need to ignore it because it would be detrimental to their particular business if they honed in on that sort of,
ah, of a negative focused again, you’re the experts. But consider helping your clients creating campaigns in response to this,
or creating a business strategy with intentionally not focusing on this. For example, if you have a client that has a cruise ship,
then you’re probably not gonna be talking about Cove in 19. But there are other marketing campaigns that that can be built on.
If you have a physical product, you can increase your sales by making alterations to what you offer how you bundle your packages.
Think about that. So if you sell, you know diffusers and CBD oil and you know in different hair bows for kids.
Can you make packages? And can you market your packages? Can you create new products based on what people want right now with other things that are happening?
And I want you to think creatively outside of the box? What can you do to create, or how can you alter what you already have in order to meet people’s names?
If you’re in real estate, can you offer those virtual home tourist for your clients? So where you’re taking your cell phone,
your face, timing them, Or maybe you’re going through each one of the homes that you have under your less teen and you’re doing video tours of the homes with your commentating,
so it’s very personal. It’s just like you were there taking a client through a home. But instead they don’t have to be there.
You can facetime them. They can say, Hey, can you go back? I want I want to see that room again and you can walk them through there.
So really thinking outside of the box and disrupting business is normal in order to provide a really great amazing service and continue to grow your company.
If you’re a travel blogger, what can you do? The highlight. Different things that people can do at home in the area outside.
You know, these are all specific suggestions for you, and I want you to really be thinking outside of the box in different ways.
You can continue to serve your clients, continue to increase your sales and continue to grow your business during this crazy time.
Okay, and that ends our time together today, where we’re talking about strategies to bring your local business online during this time,
different ways to connect with your team different outside of the box ideas to continue to grow your service is and continue to serve your clients.
And, of course, for those of you were established online entrepreneurs already, we talked about different things that you could do to really focus in and bringing your brand to the next level during this time and for all the show notes from this episode,
please cruise over to sweet Life podcast dot com forward slash 1 66 where you’ll also find business help to learn to grow in scale,
your business online in different opportunities where we can help you do that immediately if needed. And if you’re interested in hearing the personal side of some of the preparations were doing,
the things were focusing on as a family and how we’re helping our kids just hang on tight and I’ll be right back.
Okay, welcome to the beach house. I’m opening the front door and sharing with you some pretty personal stuff regarding this episode.
This issue that we’re all dealing with globally and just sharing with you. For those few were interested in a little bit about how how we deal with us,
how we prepare for things like this, and so In order to give you some background, I need to tell you a story which many of you do not know.
I don’t talk about it very often. But my youngest son, Samuel, was born with very severe food allergies.
And at a very young age, I learned that if there was ever an emergency that the American Red Cross couldn’t feed him,
he really could eat nothing in. So from the time he was a baby, I’ve always had stockpiles of food because I’ve had this deep rooted mama fear that he’s going to starve if they’re Waas something that happened in 2011.
I believe it was. We were here in the 100 year flood in Colorado and I was very glad that we did have food supply because we needed it.
And so we are very prepared as a family. There are reasons why we’re very prepared. I wish that I didn’t have to walk through is a mom and my son didn’t have to walk through all the scary times that he did.
Is is a young kid with severe allergies, but because of those things, there’s always beauty in the ashes,
you know, because of those things were always very prepared. So if you’re curious here in the beach house,
yes, we have lots of supplies, but I want to encourage you to do whatever you feel is comfortable.
You need to do what brings you peace. Obviously, they’re different guidelines or recommendations based on what country you live in in what your government recommends that you have.
But I just want to encourage you, too, do you? And to find peace in whatever brings you peace.
There are a few cool things that you could be doing at home with your kids, like maybe reading a series of books that you’ve never been able to dive into.
I was just thinking of reading Call the Wild with my kids because I know the movie is out, and I haven’t read that since I was a kid.
My boys have never read it, so I know there are a lot of things that I think about.
It’s almost like what you think about if you’re stuck in a blizzard for a long time, all the fun things we could do at home.
We as a family love Qattan. We absolutely, totally geek out on that game. And so we play a lot of Qattan,
and there are multiple different things that you can do at home to really make this time with your kids super special in.
So if you find yourself where you stuck at home, I don’t know if you will be when you listen to the show and I’m hoping that none of us have to be.
But if we find ourselves a bit isolated, there are some really fun things that we could do to find the silver lining and to connect with each other more deeply.
And I just want to encourage you guys to do that. And although this is not a Christian business podcast,
I’m very transparent, and you guys know that I’m a Christian, even though I love using the F word and costing a lot as well that really trips a lot of people up any out.
I’m not shy about that. And so one of the things that we’ve been doing is sharing with her two kids different scripture that they can stand on when they’re feeling afraid in giving them a couple of different tools every single day before they leave the house and I just want to share with you.
This is very personal. I’m not saying that every family needs to do this, but I want to share with you guys what I do every day before I send my kids Doctor school.
Besides the basic, you know, making sure their address didn’t have shoes on and something to eat every single day before they leave,
we pray over them. We plead the blood of Jesus over them. And now I also anoint them with oil and those air things that based on Scripture.
Lord says that as parents we have authority to do for our kids to help protect them in the world,
not just in times like this, and honestly, shame on me for really ramping it up. Doing it now,
in times when, you know, it could be a little sketch to send him out in the world.
I should be doing this every day, but this is what we’re doing now. And they just wanted to close out and read you guys really cool little excerpt from Jesus Colleen on March the 10th.
This is the day that I’m recording this show, so I thought I would just read for you guys real quickly here.
It said what it says. It says your mind for all time and beyond time into eternity. No power can deny your inheritance in heaven.
Even if you falter, is you journey through life. I will never let go of your hand. And that’s just a short little snippet from Jesus calling.
And I have clients with many face. I serve and I connect, and I am very good friends with women who believe a variety of different things.
And so I’m just sharing with you behind the scenes what we do as a family, and I just want to encourage you to tap into your piece to your source.
During this time, we’re really strategic on a business building side, but we and you’ve heard me talk about this.
If you’ve listened to this show for three years, I don’t believe in work. Life balance. I believe in building companies that harmoniously connect with each other,
and now is just a CZ important to talk about that. So that’s today’s show. Thank you so much for hanging out with me.
I adore you. I hope you found the strategy is helpful I hope those view establish entrepreneurs. Her listening you felt challenged to bring your brand to the next level during this time,
focus on some things, maybe even putting on the back burner. And there are a lot of software.
Resource is for you here in this show. You don’t have to remember them all. I will make sure that we have links to every single software resource for you to check out whether your new toe online business or you have been doing online business serving your clients online for a long time.
I’ll make sure all the resources are in the show notes. You could find those show notes by visiting suite Life podcast dot com board slash one 66.
Thanks so much, You guys, I’ll talk to you next week.
That’s all folks!

Episode 165: How To Grow Your Business With Pinterest – With April Beach and Melanie Fountain

Melanie Fountain SweetLife Entrepreneur April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Those in any phase of my Lifestyle Entrepreneur System
  2. Those who have used Pinterest for their business yet and are interested in getting started

Show Highlights:

  • Pinterest expert, Melanie Fountain, will help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day and week on Pinterest
  • Why Pinterest is so powerful; especially when compared to social media platforms
  • How you can get started with your very own Pinterest marketing plan today

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community 

Resources Mentioned:

Melanie Fountain’s Website

Melanie Fountain on Pinterest

Melanie Fountain’s Facebook Group | Pinterest for Bloggers and Content Creators

Schedule Your FREE Strategy Call with Melanie Fountain



SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest

April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram 

Full Show Transcript:


you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hi, everyone, Thanks so much for tuning in with me again for another week. Here on the suite Life podcast It’s good to talk to you and connect again, and today we’re diving Maur into online marketing strategies. Last week on the show, I talked to those of you guys who have been doing a lot of work. Maybe you’re spending a lot of time on instagram or on Facebook or even on LinkedIn,
and your numbers just aren’t growing. And we dove into some really authentic marketing strategies that have worked for years and are important to keep integrating into your business to grow your following. Today we’re diving back into some of the online marketing strategies because, as a business owner in today’s day and age were all online marketers. And so it is important that we’re always continuing too deep in our online marketing skills, and so I am thrilled to be joined by a Pinterest business building expert on today’s show. Now I’ll be honest with you.
I’m not a Pinterest person. I don’t cook, so I usually tell Go after recipes. I do love looking at Pinterest for design and in home needs, but it’s not something I do on a regular basis, maybe like five times a year, So I don’t even think that actually counts at all. But we do is a business, have a Pinterest account and it always shocks me. When I go over to our Pinterest account and I see how many followers we have or how many people are noticing the content,
I often think to myself, Wow, this is a really engaged platform. I should be here more, but the truth is, we haven’t as a company. It wasn’t something that we had had on our marketing strategy and plan. And so I have the privilege of interviewing today’s guest. After this interview, I asked our guest who was amazing to sit down with myself and Kelly, who is my content quarterback for the content for the show, and we started diving into our pincher strategy, and I will tell you,
with only one week of doing the strategy that you’re gonna learn here on this show, are Pinterest percentage has risen by something crazy like 1900% engagement. It was insane. The numbers from one week of doing What Today’s guest taught us how to d’oh from today’s show. So I’m so excited to introduce you and share of these strategies with you. So today’s podcast is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur business building system. But if you have not used Pinterest before and you want to try that strategy so it doesn’t matter where you are in your business building if you haven’t built your business yet or if you’re an established scaled multi six figure company and you want to use Pinterest,
this show is for you as well. This show also is going to help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day, every single week on Pinterest. How Pinterest works, why Pinterest is powerful, especially when you compare it to other social media handles in the S e o aspects of Pinterest and how you can get started on your very own Pinterest marketing plan today. You’re gonna leave with all of those answers after this show If you’re busy and you can’t take notes of what we’re talking about,
you can find all the show notes over its sweet life. Podcast dot com forward slash 1 65 All right. You guys were here with Melanie Fountain, and she is a Pinterest guru. We’ve been wanting to bring interest experts on the show because you guys are asking for it. We as a company, we want to know more about growing and connection with our listener to followers rip interest. So I’m super stoked about this show. We’re talking about everything interests who should be on Pinterest, how to activate your business and Pinterest.
You know how to grow your list through Pinterest how to get started software scheduling all of the I would save basics. But I’ve been through, you know, we’ve been through this outline of what we’re gonna talk about before, and it is foundational information, but really, really powerful. So I’m very excited to have Melanie on the show. Please introduce yourself and let everybody know who you are. Hi, everybody. I’m so excited to be on here today. Thank you, April for having me. My name is Melanie Fountain.
I am a blogger and Pinterest strategist. So I work with bloggers, content creators and business owners that want to get their contents scene without paying ah ton of money on ads or having to worry so much about website S E 02 ranking Google and that heavy competition. And we strategize based on their content. And really, it’s kind of let the little guy be seen. And it’s possible to market yourself without paying a lot of money and add. I love it. Okay. And how long have you been doing this?
And what’s your history? How did you get end to doing this? I love hearing everybody’s stories, and I know a lot of our listeners resonate with our guest stories. So tell us just really quickly some background of how you started doing this. Sure. Well, you know what? This month is my year anniversary of really calling myself an entrepreneur. And I started as a virtual assistant, so as a general virtual assistant, just wanting to get out of the regular 9 to 5. I’m a single mom and I live in California,
and I really wanted to, you know, you feel like you’re missing out on life when you’re working your life away for a company. But you know, you’re really not going to grow in. So I decided to sign up for a virtual assistant course, and then it kind of went like wildfire from there, and I fell in love with Pin Trust and the visual side event. But then the you know, the strategy behind it, the marketing and I started working with business owners and found that I actually had a talent in it.
And so I actually started as a Pinterest strategist about nine months ago now. But since then I’ve been able to work with over a dozen business owners, helping them grow Pinterest and strategize. And in May of 2019 I was able to quit my job. And so I’ve been working for myself for the last nine months. Net war Basically, since I transitioned over to nation down into Pinterest marketing and here we are that’s such on the awesome story.
Oh, my gosh, that’s a chance. My story and that story alone like, forget we’re gonna talk about pictures today.
That story alone, a lot of our listeners are like I can’t wait to be there and that’s what I’m working towards.
And so it’s really cool, especially in such a short period of time hearing those awesome results, and I will just kind of add in there.
The reason why Melanie probably had such amazing results is because she needs down like she is that pinchers expert.
If she was like I’m the V eight, all people in all things, I can guarantee you her business wouldn’t be where it is today.
So we talk about Nietzschean a lot on this podcast. She is a perfect example. That’s so I’m super excited that you’re on the show today,
So we’re gonna talk about Pinterest everything. First of all, give us some background about Pinterest. What,
actually is it cause it’s not a social media platform? Right, Right? Exactly. So Pinterest is commonly known as a social media platform,
but what it actually is is a search engine. It’s a visual Google, and more than that, it’s a discovery engine.
When people go on Pinterest, they want to be inspired. They want to discover they want to learn,
but they don’t always know what it is exactly. They’re searching for soap. Interest is there for people to discover what it is they’re searching for.
And a lot of the time from a business perspective. They’re there to discover you were there to discover your business and the value that you have to provide.
And Pinterest has over 300 million active people monthly on Pinterest, searching for businesses like the businesses that listen to this podcast.
That’s crazy. That’s somebody over multi 1,000,000,000 searches every month. And and that’s why I’m a little bit we’re gonna talk about s CEO and how to be found on pin trust,
of course, but it’s such a powerful platform. And on Lee now, are people really starting to discover the power of interest?
That’s so cool. Okay, so one of our listeners, you know, she’ll be out there saying,
Okay, that’s cool. But I’m on all these other social media platforms and you know, I’m strapped for time,
So just reiterating what you just said. It is a surgeon, Jen. It is searchable by Google,
and it’s actually on Lee search engine that we know of today that actually is searchable by Google. Is that correct?
YouTube is as well, but that’s right. Yeah, So there’s YouTube Interesting Google and those are the big guys when they have to search engine.
And that’s the funny thing. And I’m glad that you mentioned that April because when you’re searching something in Google,
a lot of the articles and images that come up are also on Pinterest. So when you’re on Pinterest,
you’re kind of killing two birds with one stone, right? Yeah, you’re definitely increasing CEO getting to page one and all that stuff.
You were gonna talk about that? Okay, so who should be on Pinterest? If you are creating consistent content,
you should be on Pinterest and it’s really a simple is that you don’t have to have a blawg. You know it’s helpful.
Absolutely. But if you’re a podcaster, if you create videos if you write article, you know, if you’re creating content,
Pinterest is where you should be. Okay, awesome and some things like Okay, cool. How do I get started?
I talked to people about the different stream like a business account and a regular account is Pinterest have both different types of accounts.
So when you when you sign on to Pinterest is a user, when you create an account most of the time you’re creating a personal account.
The difference between creating a personal account in the business account. When you have a business account, you will lock features like analytics.
You can track the performance of pans you contract clicks to your website. You can leak Pinterest to your website to enable rich pins,
which basically pulls the metadata and on the S E o from your website, making your pants more likely to be seen super cool.
Okay, so is it still one account? So you sign up. Is that personal? And then you upgrade to business or they to separate accounts to usually recommend people have.
It depends, so you could do both. As a personal account. You could convert and make some of your more personal boards secret or if you’re a blogger,
and if your lifestyle blogger and a lot of your boards are already relevant to your ideal audience, then you can keep those boards.
But sometimes I could recommend if you have ah, 100 boards random, completely unrelated to your business, it might be better to create a whole new account altogether.
Okay, Super interesting. All right. And then how does somebody get started setting up their account. It’s freeze.
So if you want to get started on Pinterest, you sign up for your business account. Oh, you know,
if you have a website you put in your domain, you make sure that you clean your social media accounts and then when you’re really got me started on,
Pinterest is all about content and, you know, scheduling to different board. So I have a 10 10 rules.
So you want to start with 10 templates, I recommend Camba. It’s free to start, and they have a really good monthly program with all these stock photos,
and they have a lot of Pinterest template to. So if you’re not a graphic designer and that’s not your,
that’s not your thing. Campbell has a lot of free templates. Create 10 of them and then you can just kind of plug and play.
I recommend about Reed of four pins for a piece of content, and if you have a lot of content,
but you’re just getting started on Pinterest, just pick may be the last five pieces of content blowing post podcast and then create four or five pens for each of those,
and then you could eventually work backwards if you want to do that and then use those 10 templates and then schedule them to 10 relevant board.
So when you’re creating boards, I recommend having, like, a best of board of your business. So on Lee,
your content goes in that board. And then if you’re a blogger having your content with all of your blonde post and one or a podcaster,
whatever your content, maybe and then beyond that have really generally named boards. So that way, when you’re scheduling content,
we’ll get to schedule that you just a little bit. But when you’re scheduling to those boards, you can pretty much set your Pinterest on autopilot.
So you know, if you can’t afford to have somebody managing. But you kind of, you know,
with Pinterest, I’ll get more into this, but you want to schedule at least 8 to 10 times per day.
Oh, my gosh. Okay, let me ask you some questions. One of the things that you said Waas and I want to make sure our listeners you’re hearing this.
So for every piece of content, you want to create three separate kin’s three separate posts from that content.
This is great content repurpose ing strategy, a love that you said that. So for every piece of content you guys create,
whether it is an article that you’ve written on your website or if it doesn’t matter where you want to send them,
you could somebody actually an article he wrote on somebody else’s website to establish you as an expert or if you’re a guest on somebody’s podcasts and them two that podcast,
whatever it is. But for every piece of content you recommend three different posts, and then you recommend 10 different templates to choose those three different posts from so 10 templates that you creating Can va there,
there and all you have to do is plug and play a different title plug and play different image in there.
We heard that. Christ, Lee. Yes. Okay, all right. And then Pinterest for those of our listeners that haven’t been on there yet,
has boards. And you can place your own content, your boards, you can pin somebody else’s content to your board.
And so what you’re saying is, and I love this this is really great. So a lot of our listeners are in the phase of actually scaling their business where they’ve been in business for a long time.
And they do have a lot of content, whether they’re podcasters or bloggers or just straight content creators and other capacities.
So in love, the best of board, so the best of board totally cool. And you’re also recommending those people that are bloggers have a board to put their block post to have or their articles?
Would you recommend any other kind of creative boards like we? D’oh! We like to do a lot of promotion of our clients and of our podcast listeners.
So would you recommend, For example, we had a sweet life entrepreneur, a podcast like featured listener board where we could send linked to our favorite and greatest listeners.
You know, would that be something that you’d recommend as well, even though it doesn’t actually promote our company?
But it would make other people realize what we’re about? Are those type of things beneficial as well on Pinterest?
Absolutely. You could do, you know, and I love my client’s board and share your client’s content.
You can you know your podcast episodes. If you’re somebody that creates AA lot of freebies and you have a resource library.
You can have a board just on sweet life. Entrepreneur freebies. Wait. Have 100 and 57 of them.
Okay, well, you know what? There’s 400 pins, you know? Go. Yeah, and I love how you said repurposing content because that’s exactly what it is.
It doesn’t have to be hard. It’s a long I’m talking and all of you are probably thinking, Oh,
my gosh, this is overwhelming. But it’s really just taking the content you already have and putting it out there for the world to see.
I love it. Okay, so now let’s go back to my short little heart attack when you said eight times today posting.
So let’s talk about posting frequency. What is that like, How often are people on Pinterest? So,
for example, when we look at it another social platform, even though we’re trying to say that Pinterest isn’t one of them,
but another platform where you can put content like Lincoln, for example, the average person only goes toe linked in twice a month.
Okay, so every single different outlet has a different frequency. Talk to me about Penn dresses, Pinterest frequency.
Why? Eight times a day. It’s all about S E O. It’s about also staying relevant because you have,
ah 100 million you active users every month. Ah, good portion of that. Our business owners putting up their content constantly,
and it’s also about staying on top of the feeds you want to be. You know, it is search engine optimization,
so the more frequently you post they could be anywhere from eight times a day to 50 times a day.
And that’s why it’s really important to have a good scheduling tool. The reason why you do that also is to continue to be able to share your content.
Work frequently because you can share one pin once a day. But if you’re on Lee sharing that pin,
then you can only really share that every selected because your feet is just going to be like, Hey,
look at me, look at me. So that’s why you want so many different pens. And once you get in a rhythm of scheduling them out,
it’s not so overwhelming. So you know, at first, you know, getting everything set up is time consuming.
But once you get everything set up and automated in a loop in in a schedule that eight times a day will quickly increase to kind of get your get your content more likely to be seen.
Okay, a ball questions number one. Can you on Pinterest re share the same pin over and over again?
Or would that just be repenting the same pin to a board? Or is it actually fresh brand new pieces of content that should be released eight times a day?
You can repent the same pin every day, but two different boards. That’s why you want to start with 10 boards and continue to grow off of that.
So at it, it’s more important tohave more boards than it is to have a lot of pins and a few boards.
So that’s why I think it’s very important to have general board. So when you have one pin, let’s say you’re a travel blogger or something,
and you have aboard all about trouble and then international travel and traveling abroad and their own really general terms.
But then, if you have something about traveling to bully, you can schedule that panto all of those boards once a day,
and then it can Luke back. But then you throw in some war of your content and then that schedules to different boards.
And it’s a snowball effect because, like Google, Pinterest does take some time to recognize who you are for your account to catch up to the algorithm.
So it could take 3 to 6 months to really start saying traffic, go to your website. But by that time you will have all of the content you need to be seen on Pinterest and start getting that traffic it builds on.
It felt awesome. Okay, so let me ask you one more question about that, just to make sure I’m fully understanding.
And so when you say posting eight times a day, it still could be individual pieces of content, your meaning,
like eight times a day. You should have something landing on a different board, absolutely. And if it’s your content,
as long as it’s a different pain than it could be to the same board, you just don’t want the same pin landing in the same board eight times a day.
And if I say you’re scheduling eight times a day, it could be what, especially when you’re first starting out.
It could be six of your pans and two of somebody else’s, too, because Pinterest favors people that share other people’s content at the It’s a shared platform,
and they want to make sure to that you’re not just hearing your content and that’s how you get re pins and you’re content shared as well.
Okay, cool. Thank you for clarifying that. Love that. So you can actually grab somebody else’s pin and put it in your scheduler.
Talk a little bit about you mentioned at a scheduling tool software tool while we’re on scheduling, you know,
before we started recording that you really like to use. So my favorite and they’re partnered with Pinterest is Tailwind.
You could integrate till one with penne trust, and there’s also different analytical tools that sync up with that.
You can sink it with Google Analytics, and you could basically see all of your pants and a big schedule.
So for those of you that use Instagram scheduler like plan early or something, you could see you’re a good kind of planned out and grades aren’t so important and Pinterest,
but you can school through and see. OK, how far my planned out do I have any duplicate pans like right back to back to back and then also with until when there’s something called tribes and they’re basically like Facebook groups four Tailwind or perp in trust,
and you shared your content there. And when you drawing to TRIBE, if you share something, you also have to repent something else.
So when you share to those tribes, people are almost required to share your content as well. So there’s different sharing analytical features,
and there’s something entailing called Smart Loop. So but Tillman has a free plan for up to 30 pay,
or up to 100 pens a month. But if you’re going to invest in something with Pinterest, I would recommend upgrading that because then you pretty much get unlimited pins per month,
and then they also have Smart loop feature, so you can basically set your your pants and a smart loop,
and it will schedule to your boards for you. And that’s why I recommend having general boards so that you can set up.
You’re scheduling on automation and have your pins circulate to those general boards without having pains go to Pier 11 boards.
That that makes sense. Yeah, it does make sense. Okay, I have questions about the type of content.
Question number one is how much content shows below the pin before it’s like a remora or linked to this site button about how much text copy is usually seen.
And how important is that content and copy in addition to the graphic pen. So the pen description is really important when it comes to the S e O.
Now you really only get about. I think it’s 250 characters that you get and in that and you kind of want you want to give a description with enough C words in there with maybe 2 to 3 hashtags,
you know, up branded one and some general ones know usually with instagram those hash times a really neat show with Pinterest.
You want them to be very general, and then you kind of want to call the action. You know,
you don’t have to have the link, but you want something like, you know, for more tips and tricks.
Visit my website, read my blog’s, but you don’t want anything like Click cheered. You know, by this,
because then you might get registered as Clickbait or spam. So you want to be very careful and Pinterest uses its own S C O.
So when you’re looking for key words for your pin descriptions, you want to use the search bar and Pinterest to find the key words you’re going to use to describe your content.
Oh, fascinating, Yes, totally a different strategy than we see on Instagram and those other places. Okay,
so this is where the search ability comes in is actually the copy underneath the pen because you can’t read copy from a graphic.
Super curious about that in Pedro’s does use Hashtags, so that’s just fascinating. This well, in the different hashtag strategies they aren’t is nish.
I think that’s fascinating. Okay, uh, let’s talk about video a little bit. Okay? Interest actually allows video.
What kind of video does Pinterest like in a wow? So unlike most of the platforms, Pinterest is vertical with video pens.
You see vertical pens or square almost like Instagram because there’s a really great instagram sharing capability to Pinterest now,
and that’s just developing just like the video pins. So it’s a relatively new feature. It’s in beta testing for scheduling per tail.
It and it’s really new. And it’s really exciting because with how visual Pinterest is, introducing video into that is going to be really,
really great for businesses to give a snapshot into their business without having to just create a graphic. And the videos and Pinterest are generally 20 seconds or less because you have a feed of all of these pans and because not many people are making video right now,
when you’re on your phone, when you’re scrolling through Pinterest, the videos are automatically playing, so they’ll catch your attention quicker.
So that’s why it’s so powerful to do it. And you could do something like a goby spark people.
You can use a snippet from your YouTube videos. You can get really, really creative when it comes to your video pins,
and it’s so new that people are just still developing the strategies for it. People use them a lot for Pinterest ads,
so Pinterest does have add capabilities. You know, a lot of people don’t ever use ads, but primarily they were used for ad,
and now you can use them just for organic reach. Supercool. Okay, what else should I be asking you that I didn’t ask you for those of our listeners that are interested in getting started to create more visibility with interest.
So when it comes to pen Trust s CEO is key because it is a search and we’ve kind of touched on it during this.
But I just want to make sure that if you’re going to go on Pinterest and you’re going to start implementing this as a strategy for marketing,
which I highly recommend for any content creators in any regard. But optimize your Pinterest description with keywords and give called actions your board’s make sure that you have each of your boards categorize and described with S E O using the S E o from Pinterest giving called actions to your websites because a lot of the time people get the board recommendations more than profile recommendations,
so they may land on your board before they ever land in your profile. So you want to make sure that you have a called action so they know you’re a business that you mean business and that you have awesome content to provide so and then the pen description.
Something s e o is key. If you’re gonna learn anything about Pinterest. Make sure that you know how to use keywords.
Awesome! Oh, my gosh. I have so much I want to talk to my team about right now that I just can’t wait to get off this interview and turn all this over to them.
Thank you so much for your time. Melanie, This was exciting. I love this. I love this show.
Led this interview. How can people find you so I actually have a free pace. But group where I go with a live weekly and interested Tuesday is that I just had one this morning and I share with the groom have use Pinterest Ansel content ideas.
I also offer free strategy calls for business owners that want some one on one. Just kind of wanna get pointed in the right direction.
And April I will give you my social media links so people can stay connected and I give a lot of probably way more pitch free paint.
Could trust advice that I said I love it. I love it. I love Yeah. We’ll make sure all the links to find you are in the show notes for this episode.
Thank you so much for your time. Melanie. I learned a lot today. I appreciate it. Thank you so much,
April. All right, you guys, that’s a wrap. Thank you so much for tuning into the show today for all the show notes.
And the resource is how to connect with Melanie Moore and how to get literally tons of free resource is to grow your business.
If you haven’t been to our podcast website lately, it’s pretty incredible. You can actually sort all of our shows by what you’re looking for,
whether it’s marketing. Brandon copyrighting online courses Landing your first client Every single thing you need. There are years and years of free resource is there,
so please use that website over at sweet life podcast dot com. And before we go, I want to make sure I’m giving a shout out to this week’s sweet life podcast Superfan.
This is 311 solution. You confined them by visiting 311 solution. C b d dot com there. Empowering healthier lifestyles.
Effective C B D supplements from lab tested hemp life in balance. And Shelly is one of our biggest fans of my Facebook page,
and she is always working hard to build her business, working hard to bring a quality product to market.
I know that based on the the D EMS that she sends me and she tunes in here to the sweet life podcast.
And so we wanted to give her a shout out. Shelly, thank you so much for listening to the show.
Thank you for being a super fan of this show and really creating an awesome, brisk business bringing amazing products to the people that need them.
So go over and give Shelly a shout out at 311 solution CBD. She also could be found on Instagram at 311 solution CBD and on Facebook at 311 solution.
All right, you guys have an awesome day. I’ll talk to you soon.
That’s all folks!

Episode 164: Is Your Online Marketing Failing? Here are 5 Solutions You Can Count On – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Those of you who are doing everything you’re told and your online marketing still isn’t working
  2. Anyone in any phase of my Lifestyle Business Roadmap

Show Highlights:

  • How online marketing sales have changed over the past few years
  • The story of how Facebook completely stonewalled my recent marketing efforts
  • The five strategies you can implement to continue to grow your list and business and increase your sales when all else fails

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community

Resources Mentioned:

My Business Website

Want to become an Affiliate of our company? Email hello@sweetlifeco.com

Speakers Summit Mastermind™

Help a Report Out (HARO)

Kristen Foust on Instagram

Every Day I’m Preppin’

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 133: The Power Of Superfans: How to Create A Community Of Superfans Who Love And Follow You Forever – with Pat Flynn

April Beach on Instagram

Full Show Transcript:


you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe age. You guys coming to you from a very cold boulder, Colorado. I’m holding my cup of tea recording this episode for you and I’m hoping that my voice holds out. I have the whole Debra Winger thing going on here, but don’t quite sound as sexy as she does. And I have a very special message that I want to share. This is actually one that I fit into our podcast content editorial calendar because of the fact that it’s come up so much,
I think it’s really important for us to talk about today. We are talking about what to do when everything that you’ve been told to dio to market your business online is totally failing. So this means the Facebook ads, the instagram, you know, strategies and the filters and that perfect feeds and a certain number of stories you post each day and how to go live on LinkedIn. All the things you’ve been told or what you quote unquote are supposed to do to grow your business and grow your list. What do you do when they aren’t working?
This is something that we’re hearing more and more about. So the funnels that we had used and that had worked so well to grow lists from 2015 to 2018 they aren’t working so hot anymore until the online strategies of business development aren’t working for everybody the way that they used Thio. And I want to talk about that because I’m a business coach. I coach you guys and I have a lot of women out there that are doing everything quote unquote right, right. You know, on my team of experts, I have Facebook experts and Instagram experts.
And finally, a couple of weeks ago, we hit a total brick wall within my own business. So I’m gonna tell you this story. And this is why it really triggered me to record this episode for you about two weeks ago when we were going through to trigger our ads to Sweet Life Launch, which is my business launch and development program that was open for a short period of time. All of our ads were stonewalled by Facebook, which means Facebook rejected all of our ads. Now these were the same ads.
We ran over and over again, and we went through the language making sure that language was right. We went through making sure there weren’t any, like, shifty promises and the ads, you know, because Facebook’s always, you know, trying to be careful for what businesses advertise on their platform anyway. Total Stonewall meeting with Facebook’s Our Facebook ads strategist who is a Facebook at expert. She has been for years. She met, looked with Facebook anyway. Our ads were not approved in. Facebook has now been putting a crunch on ad strategies for business coaches,
and we’re starting to feel the effects of some of the online marketing strategies that works really, really well for years and years. What happens is when a lot of people start doing them. They stopped working so well and we hit that brick wall. I know that this is also happening in and many of your businesses to Maybe you’re following an instagram strategy or a social media planning calendar. That somebody you said would be perfect and it’s not working for you. So whether you have your Facebook ads disapproved for literally no reason like we did.
Your funnels aren’t attracting buyers anymore. You’re wasting hours a week on instagram and not gaining any following all. Maybe you host live webinars. Maybe you’re using a live weapon, our strategy to sell into your programs. Maybe that’s just not working. And I’m not saying these aren’t working for everybody is a matter of fact. A client of mine just hosted live Webinars and sold her online course for $40,000 for the first launch. I mean, some of these strategies are working great, but for many of you, they aren’t.
So this is the podcast to be listening to If everything that everybody said to d’oh you have done and your list still isn’t growing, your business isn’t booming. You aren’t gaining your followers today.
We’re gonna talk about how to market your business when all else fails. So this particular episode is for those of you guys who are in all phases of my lifestyle entrepreneur road map.
If you aren’t sure where you are, just pause this episode really quick in just text to the number 31996 and you’re gonna wanna text to the word sweet life one word and that I’ll just shoot you a link.
You can take a small short assessment, and it’ll tell you exactly where you are on the road map to build the lifestyle business of your dreams and give you steps and thinks you should be working on based on where you are.
So this particular episode, this online marketing kind of fail. This is not just for new entrepreneurs. This is affecting established businesses,
too. So this particular episode is for every single phase of my lifestyle. Entrepreneur of my lifestyle, business,
road map. And today we’re gonna talk about five different strategies that you can d’oh to continue to grow your list and grow your business and increase your sales when all else fails.
All the show notes for this episode can be found it. Sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 1 64 and stick around to the end of this episode.
We are featuring a podcast listener and their business every single week in promoting you guys out on instagram and on Facebook and helping your business gain more traction and get more attention to so stick around at the end of the show,
and you will get to know our featured listener and for you to be our featured listener. Simply go to sweet life podcast dot com and applied to be the next featured business and listener.
Okay, let’s go ahead and dive in. Okay, Step number one. The first thing to do when all of your online marketing fails.
The first thing to do is to create a network of online businesses just like yours. That you resonate with you are,
may be in the same place, is they are in their business, and I want you to create personal relationships with them.
Here is the purpose of doing this when you create a collective of businesses that don’t do the same thing.
Just a collective of like minded women in a small group, not 20 not 30 were like talking five or seven,
and you create this collective of businesses that you take the time to get to know each other. You take the time to get to know the service’s of one another.
You actually go through almost like a mini brand training with each other, and you create this collective of promoting each other’s businesses connecting with each other online and offline.
That is gold to your company. So here’s your homework for this. This is picking five people from online.
I want you to pick five different businesses online. You can connect with them from Facebook groups that you’re in.
As long as that, of course, abide by those group rules. You can connect with him on Instagram,
and I want you to reach out to all of them individually at first and just say this. Say,
Hey, listen, I’m working hard to get my business noticed. I see you’re working hard to get your business noticed us?
Well, I’d love to get to know you create a relationship with you. Hey, let’s have coffee sometime and you get to know them.
You get to know what they’re doing. This takes time. Folks like there is no press easy button here.
And that’s the downfall of online marketing. Is it? For so many years, you’ve been told that this is an easy button with online marketing that you could just hit,
and all these people are just going to show up at your front doorstep. It doesn’t always work that way,
and it’s starting to work that way less unless, Okay, so taking time to have coffee with another business virtually online,
even just for 15 minutes and getting to know each other is a powerful first step. My recommendation is to do this with five different businesses individually,
and then set up a zoom virtual coffee date with these five ladies once a month. It’s like your own little mini mastermind,
and what happens is you become part of each other’s lives and you know about each other’s businesses in those relationships grow and you’ll start commenting on their things on social media,
and they’ll start commenting on yours. They’ll refer other people to your business, and vice versa. That is number one.
Best way is to create a community. Collective was just you and a few other girls Where you connect with these relationships are the ones that build profitable,
powerful, multi six figure cos they start like this. They start by a hanging out and having coffee together,
being intentional. So that is step number one Stuff member. Choose to be common affiliate be becoming an affiliate means that your company sells another company’s program,
service’s or products. This is a really great way to number one, have your business seen as a leader and a somebody that sells really resourceful products,
even if they aren’t your own number two. To be able to build a relationship with other businesses by supporting them to sell their programs and offers and number three by increasing your sales when you become an affiliate,
you automatically are brought into a collective of other affiliates that air promoting the same program the same offer. This is an amazing way to network to share what you do and,
of course, to make more online friends when you make more online friends and you have more people on your side where people are going to share your business and recommend you that other people,
these personal relationships supersede anything that you can d’oh even any video strategy that you could do and just put out there to a cold audience.
Having somebody personally recommend you will always come first. Now the question is, you ask, how do I become an affiliate now?
This isn’t a whole training on how to become an affiliate for somebody else, but let’s just cut to the chase.
If you see a program that you like and you’d like to sell, reach out to the person personally in just a Hey,
listen, I love what you’re doing. I believe in what you’re doing. Can I help you sell it?
Can I be an affiliate? One of my favorite programs that I sell for somebody else’s for my friends.
Selena Sue. She has a program called Impacting Millions. It teaches people how to get press and how to get media exposure in your business,
and I love this program. I’ve been affiliate for her for years now, and the way I did that was reaching out to her and say,
Hey, I love what you’re doing. This is not something I currently coach my clients on. I would love to sell yours.
How can I help you? How can I be of service to you? And being part of Selena’s affiliate program has actually introduced me to some of my very best online business Girlfriends is a matter of fact two of them.
I just hosted a virtual weekend summit with These are great relationships, and what it’s gonna do is it’s gonna open the doors from our networking for you,
but it’s also going to increase your sales and get your company more exposure. So that is step number 27 of our three is did speak.
I’ve been talking about speaking here on this podcast. This is really important for you getting up personally in front of an audience in actually speaking to them,
teaching a training or sharing your message. It doesn’t matter if it’s 10 people or 100 people or 1000 people.
When you do that, you connect one on one with that listener in a way that you can’t any other way through online marketing.
And so I encourage you to speak to get out there. And your action item on this is just to make a list of five different events that you would like to speak at this year.
Five different places. They’re your wish list of events. Where do you want to talk? Is there a woman Start up summit or Health and Fitness Summit and go and start doing your research.
Figure out how you can apply for that and start getting your ducks in a row to do that. We talk all the time here on this podcast and that actual summit that I hosted with to my Only Girlfriends was called Speaker Summit That teaches you how to have resource is to book yourself to speak so you can always cruise back to sweet life co dot com.
My Web site and find resource is to learn how to speak their a swell. But your action item on this is just to make a list of five different dream stages that you would like to speak on.
They don’t have to be big. The small ones in the local communities in your small towns are the ones that build almost just is powerful relationships,
as if you’re a big keynote speaker for an annual event. So Number four is to get press and media attention.
Now. Press and media attention doesn’t automatically create a marketing funnel for you. However, when you get press and media attention,
what it does is it attracts high quality businesses and high quality buyers to you. This is an alternative to our traditional online marketing standards that we’ve been talking about because it’s a way that immediately elevates you as an expert.
Whether you’re contributing to an article whether you’re quoted in the magazine, whatever it may be getting press and media attention for your business will always supersede your authority above any sort of personal self posting you’re doing across social media.
It’s having an endorsement from a media outlets saying, Hey, look, this chick knows when she’s talking about,
and we’re gonna quote her in this article because we think she’s a reputable source. So having that sort of exposure is going to attract other businesses to you,
and it’s going to then attract marketing to you. So it’s one of those things that you can do that’s free.
You don’t have to pay for it other than sweat equity to submit your article to be featured in a publication.
And one of the resource is we’ve shared here for the last couple of years on this podcast on how to get awesome Press and media attention is a resource called Help a Reporter out.
It’s a free resource where you can submit yourself as an expert and we’ll go ahead and make sure we put a link to help a reporter out,
also known as Harrow in the show notes for this episode for You and then the fifth strategy to grow your business,
aside from online marketing, is to host offline events. This could be a meet up, but you d’oh!
It could be a luncheon for local businesses in your area. There doesn’t have to be a cost to it.
It’s just hosting an event to bring people closer to you within your community that are your perspective clients. Even if you have an online business,
it’s important to know that the best, most lucrative relationships are built face to face. So those followers those super fans is Pat.
Fling calls them those first followers of a new service or a new offer. You can get those source first followers locally,
and then they become your biggest online cheerleaders. They become your biggest fans. I still remember when I was launching this podcast and we had a big,
huge podcast launch team that was so grateful for all of the women, all the people that took part in it.
But the majority of listeners on that podcast launch team. We’re from Colorado. They were friends and friends of friends,
and it was really awesome. There were hundreds of people that flooded the airwaves sharing this podcast, but that started local and it catapulted us to the top female entrepreneur podcast for over 20 weeks straight.
So I want you to know that those things work. Don’t just cut to the chase and go immediately to these online relationships.
And if you find yourself where you’re wondering, why isn’t this working? What is wrong with me? I’ve done every single Facebook live video that so and so told me to do,
and I’m showing up on Instagram. Story is the exact amount of time and hosting I G lives in posting interesting,
thought provoking articles that start with stories on LinkedIn and nothing is working. The most important thing to do is keep it up.
Don’t quit doing those things. Your online presence is incredibly important. I’m not saying that you should quit those things.
What I am telling you is that there are other ways to grow your business through what we call grassroots marketing that are going to build deep relationships with people that I love you and become your greatest cheerleaders.
And they aren’t always this shiny, perfect online funnel like you’re told that they are until this podcast is to let you know there’s nothing wrong with you.
You’re not doing anything wrong. You’re trying hard, you’re building your business and you’re trying to get attention into spread out and to rise above the noise.
And I love you for that. And that’s so awesome. That’s why you’re sitting here listening to this podcast episode.
But these five ways. If you just pick a couple of them, even two of these to incorporate in your marketing strategy,
I promise you they will make a world of difference. They’re not an easy but you do not get to push a button,
and these things were being instantly done for you. These things take work, but because they take work,
an intention and personal connection, that’s why they’re so powerful and they can grow your business in exponential ways.
So let’s go back over these five solutions when all of your online marketing his head a brick wall number one is defined.
Five people online from Facebook groups, or INSTAGRAM, schedule coffee dates with them, inform a little mastermind collective,
get to know each other and support each other in each other’s business is Number two is to become an affiliate in to sell somebody else’s service.
Is you can always email us if you’d like to be humming affiliate of our business programs. Simply shoot an email toe Hello at sweet life co dot com and say,
I want to be an affiliate. We would love to have you, and I know there are many other businesses out there that would love to have you sharing their offers.
And service is number three is speak. What I talked about on today’s show is really to speak. Live face to face events.
Start booking yourself on five stages, whether their local or bigger, buying five stages this year. Get out their share your message and connect with people.
Face to Face Number four is to get press and media attention, and I promised you will put the link to the heros so that you can submit yourself as an expert in the show notes for this episode.
And Number five is to host offline events hosting offline events. Coffee dates face to face strategy sessions. Maybe you host a community event where you pour into your community and you volunteer your service.
Is that you? D’oh for another group of women once every quarter. Believe me, that will give you strides of an advantage over your competitors by giving first,
we really believe that the best way to build your business is always by giving first, and that is one key way to do it.
All right, you guys help. You found this podcast helpful. If you did, I would love it.
I would really appreciate it if you’d just up arrow and sure this podcast with your friends. You can actually share this podcast directly from Spotify and Pandora to instagram.
And if you aren’t yet, please follow us at Sweet Life Podcast or at sweet Life Entrepreneur on Instagram.
I would love to chat with you over there. Okay, Your show notes for this episode can be found by visiting Suite Life podcast dot com forward slash 1 64 in today’s feature podcast Listener is Kristen Fast.
Kristen is the founder of Everyday I’m prep in dot com. She is a health coach that helps Mama’s ditch the fad diets and take control of their help,
including hormone mindset. And she just has some really cool stuff. Follow her over on Instagram at Kristen G.
Faust, and every day I’m prepping. She adjusted a really cool I g TV video, which I love about weight loss,
ms. So let’s give her a high five and go over and follow her on her business. She’s doing great stuff over there.
We’ll make sure there’s a link to Kristen’s business in the show notes for this episode as well. Okay,
you guys help. You found this helpful. I just want to encourage you that if you feel like you’re doing all the things and nothing’s working,
just keep going. Start using some of these off the side grassroots marketing strategies because these are the ways that we have built business for a long time before anybody invented shiny online funnels.
And let me tell you something. They work, all right, you guys have an awesome week and I’ll talk to you again soon.
Bye for now.

Episode 162: Want To Launch A Podcast? 10 Lessons From Behind The Mic – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. If you’re considering launching a podcast.
  2. If you want to be a guest on a podcast and you want to know the inside scoop to increase your chance of landing that guest spot.
  3.  If you’re in the growth and scaling part of your business and you appreciate hearing about times where other women have fallen on their faces and gotten back up again.

Show Highlights:

  • What hosting a podcast hosting is really like.
  • Insights to help you decide if hosting a podcast is a responsibility you want to add to your business.
  • 10 honest lessons you can apply to your business to save time, money, and sanity.

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community

Resources Mentioned:

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #65: Doing Things That Don’t Scale – with John Lee Dumas

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #133: The Power Of Superfans: How to Create A Community Of Superfans Who Love And Follow You Forever – with Pat Flynn

April Beach on Instagram

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on YouTube


you’re listening to the sweet life Entrepreneur Podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age, you guys and welcome Thio Podcast number 162 I’m April Beach and I’m so glad that you’re here were actually recording today from Burbank, California This is my very first podcast episode After three years of podcasting, Thio ever record outside of my home studio office. So it’s learning, going through the process and learning here. Sitting at the Burbank Airport Marriott,
my son Jake is in town for three days filming a music video. And it’s just part of the learning process of what we do is Mom’s and as entrepreneurs and just kind of figuring things out as we go. This was more of a last minute trip, and and so it is. It is what it is. And I’m so excited you’ve joined me on today’s show so funny a little bit behind the scenes. We actually spend a lot of time in this hotel. We’re here usually for a couple of weeks a year,
and this is the hotel you guys quiet. Yes, I’m in now. This is the hotel where they have all their producer rooms. So all of the contestants for shows like The Voice and like the new songwriter show they bring them here and they’re walking around with their guitars and you can hear them singing in the hallways. But it’s super hush hush because they’re not allowed to tell you what they’re auditioning for or what show they’re on in. So this is where they bring in, you know, all these singer songwriters to audition and to kind of go through a process of it.
So it’s super cool. So walking around in the lobby, there’s guitars everywhere and groups of people singing. And it’s always the case here at this hotel. So it’s super fun to stay at and just see a little bit, you know, behind the scenes of Hollywood and people are in and out of here all the time. That is not us. You know, nobody’s hounding us to know what we’re doing, but is cool to see honestly, all these kids that are putting themselves out there and just doing their dreams.
So here we are at the Hotel. Today’s show is for those of you guys who are considering launching a podcast, you want to be a guest on another podcast. And you really want to know that inside scoop to increase your chance of landing that dream guest spot today shows also for those of you guys who are in business scaling and growth processes. And you think you love just kind of hearing about how other women fall on their face to make you feel better about the times that you do too, Because guess what we all do.
And I’m gonna be sharing some tough lessons here with you in this episode and some things that I’ve learned along the way both podcasting and through the business of growing a podcast today shows for those of you guys who are also in phases one through five of my lifestyle Entrepreneur road map if you don’t know where you are or if you’ve never taken the quiz to find out where you are in the road map, just simply text to the word sweet life. One word to the number 3196 and will shoot over linked to take a quick quiz so you can get the whole access to the lifestyle Entrepreneur road map in my lifestyle entrepreneur system.
Happy to share that with you. Okay, before we dive into today’s show, we have a special announcement. I know we’ve been talking about it for a couple weeks. This Onley happens a few times a year, but Sweet Life Launch is open. Sweet Life launches my 90 day business launch program with weekly projects that include videos and worksheets to make your business decisions simpler and clear and to help you build your business week by week for 90 days every step of the way. Plus, you get personal coaching for me live business Training’s every single month with advanced business skills teaching you what’s happening.
Always staying on top of the latest trends in technology and marketing and business development and helping you troubleshoot common stuck problems that most women who are launching their business face on top of that sweet life launch. We also have live question and answers in hot seats for every single member. There are a lot of these mass business launch programs out there, and it’s really hard to get attention and to get your specific questions answered so sweet life launches for those of you guys that really want to connect personally and have an opportunity to ask your specific questions instead of throwing them into a baseball group with hundreds or thousands of people and actually have your business have the opportunity every single month to have a hot seat with me so that we can strategize your business development.
On top of this, I have an amazing team of guest advisors and experts and friends that I bring into this community in this month. Inside Sweet Life Launch, Jen Herman, who is an INSTAGRAM marketing expert, is teaching a private live master class too sweet life launch members on Lee. So if you were interested in launching your business, or have you been trying to launch your business and get it off the ground for a long time? Or if you’re interested in launching a business and you’re listening to this show because you’re interested in launching a podcast and you’re wondering how to develop that business in that business model and how it works,
then cruise over to sweet life co dot com forward slash launch because now is your time to get in there is for, goes on Lee open for a short window a few times a year. Okay, so we’re taking care of a little bit of business, making sure you have the business coaching and support that you need when we aren’t listening to this show. Now let’s go ahead and dive more into this show. At the end of this episode, you’ll have more insight on what podcast hosting is like. You’ll be clear.
And if this is a responsibility that you are wanting to add to your business to your weekly or your monthly regimen to your expenses, if that really makes sense for you right now, and you’ll have 10 on his lessons that you can apply to your business across the board to save time, money and sanity. So for all the show notes and everything, but I just mentioned, If you forget it and you’re on the go, you can cruise to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 162 and everything. I just mentioned the lynx I mentioned,
and the notes from this show will be in there for you. Now let’s go ahead and dive into these 10 lessons, Okay? First things first, all my numbers. Girls out there who loves numbers. Raise your hand. Let’s look at some of the podcasting statistics for 2020. These numbers come from music cunth dot com and I will go ahead and make sure, of course, there’s a link to this infographic and all these numbers for you in the show notes of this episode according to Music Goof,
the top five most popular podcasting categories or genres, our society and culture, business, comedy, news and politics and health.
Now let’s break up some of the numbers a little bit more. 70% of the U. S population are familiar with the term podcasting.
We actually have a lot of people that still have absolutely no clue how to even listen to a podcast.
And so we need to help educate other people on how to find the podcast happen their phone and how they actually consume podcasting information.
If you have a friend that doesn’t listen to podcasts, please take a second and show her on her phone.
How to do it. There are a lot of people didn’t know that there is such a thing as poss casting,
but have zero clue how, actually to consume podcasts just a little f y i If you didn’t realize that 51% of the U.
S population have listened to a podcast, 32% of the U. S population listen to podcasts every single month.
22% listen to podcasts every week. In 6% are avid podcast fans. I really believe we’re going to see that 6% in 2020 be up almost 2 18% which is 18% of the world.
Being an avid podcast fan, if you’re listening to the show thinking about launching a podcast, now’s the time,
girl. You know, this is a crazy exponential growth we’re seeing in the podcasting industry. And let me break up some of the age numbers.
28% of millennials. So 25 to 34 year olds listen to podcasts. 21% of Gen Xers like me That’s up to age 44.
Listen to podcasts. 16% of 45 to 54 year olds. Listen, a podcast, I believe out of those numbers,
we’re going to see a huge rise in the 40 something in the 50 something women consuming podcast, particularly over this year.
We’re already starting to see that, and there’s so many more numbers here on this. Infographic will make sure that there is a link to this for you,
but I just want to mention a few other things. Podcast genders. It’s almost split 50 50 men and women listen to podcasts,
and 45% of podcast listeners have a new income an annual income of greater than $250,000 a year. So as a business coach,
I work with women all the time who are struggling to actually reach an audience it can pay for. Their service is podcasting.
The average listener has a higher education level and makes more money. And so if you have a business that sells a service to people that are have more income and more money,
podcasting could be a really great option for you. But then, let’s also look at the other numbers.
32% of podcast listeners have an annual income of 75,000. So it’s not, you know, obviously, just just the half a millionaire’s that are listening to podcasts.
It’s everyday people that are listening to podcasts, so it’s a really a great clientele, and I just want you to kind of know some of the numbers behind scenes.
So I just wanted to talk about some of the numbers behind the scenes for you first. So if you’re wondering whether or not there’s actually an audience here or you can grow your business,
I will tell you that my business has grown after 22 years of business coaching exponentially since I’ve launched this show because you and I get to connect in a very Rahway that no Facebook marketing,
you know, no static image that’s on Instagram even know video that’s pre recorded that might be on. LinkedIn can connect us away that we’re connecting right now.
So there’s the numbers for all of you numbers, girls. Now let’s go ahead and dive into the 10 lessons I learned from three years of podcasting,
and some of them I learned really fast. Some of them already knew, but they became much more important in order to continually produce a popular podcast show that continues to grow every single week.
And some of them were totally a slap in the face, and I wasn’t expecting so Lesson. Number one was really to know my listeners.
So when I first launched the show, almost all my listeners were in startup. But as the show is grown,
I have listeners that stay and continue to subscribe to the show. And you know your businesses scaling your business is growing.
So I’ve learned that it’s important to break up my episodes. And so you noticed that the beginning of every single one of my shows I’ll tell you what phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur road map that each show applies to.
Well, the phase in the road map applies to where you are in your business, so, like face to is launch phase three and phase for or scale.
I had to figure out a way to categorize what I was teaching on that show so that it hit home for listeners that were in different phases of business.
And it’s really clear in the beginning of each show what actual show is for you, because I don’t want you hanging out here in spending 30 minutes with me when you could be directing that 30 minutes to doing something really productive in your business or creating something that you’ve been waiting to build.
If this show doesn’t apply to you, don’t listen. Turn it off. Come to the next one.
And so it’s one of the things that I had to learn very early on was how to categorize the things I was talking about so that my listeners immediately knew whether or not each show was a good one for them to listen to.
That was a lesson. It probably took me about 20 maybe only 10 episodes, because I had my last entrepreneur a road map for years and years before I launched this show.
But it was very quick when I realized that I want to make sure that each listener knows whether or not that show is right for them.
So if you’re thinking about launching a podcast or even in your business in general, try to figure out a way to kind of classify or categorize those people that listen to your show and help them out ahead of time,
you know, and just say, Hey, listen, this is for you or don’t be afraid to say you know what?
Don’t listen, go do something else. This isn’t for you. So lesson number one is was to learn who my listeners were and to make sure I was disqualifying certain people from listening to each episode just as much as I was pre qualifying others.
It did need to hear it. Lesson number two. I had to learn really quick to be picky about the guests I chose on this show.
This could apply to you if you weren’t a podcaster. Just being picky about the people that you know might contribute to your business or my,
you know, might want to be in a failure partner of yours. I’ve had some not so great guests on the show.
Well, I should say that I’ve recorded. So I’ve recorded shows with guests that seemed super awesome in the application process.
And then he never published shows. And honestly, it’s gonna sound terrible. Any men out there listening?
Sorry, guys. You know I love you. I love guys, but I will tell you it’s primarily the men who were guessed that would come to be a guest on the show.
In all they want to do is sell their shit. So women, we come on podcasts and we wanna contribute and have conversations.
Well, primarily, I can’t say all the men. I’ve had some amazing men who are guests on this show.
The ones I didn’t record and I didn’t publish were guys that came on in. All they wanted to do was pimp their stuff out.
So I have learned to be really, really picky about who speaks for our audience and not to waste my time recording shows that I’m never gonna air.
Now I do a lot of pre screening, so I don’t waste my time. It doesn’t mean I only have women who are guests.
So this is a women’s business podcast. And when you’re launching your podcast or in your business, you know who you serve.
Women want to hear from women, though. So I have had some amazing male guests that I just feel so honored to be on the show.
John Lee do miss who I know has been on the show in path. Flynn has been on the show so many different guys who’ve been on this show,
and I’m very picky, though at this point in time, after three years of podcasting about who I bring in.
So that was lesson number two. Lesson number three was really not to be worried about hurting other people’s feelings.
This actually wasn’t a hard lesson for me. I’m not inherently sensitive person, So being brutally honest about business was totally fine.
However, I know that I’ve lost some listeners because sometimes I come a crime, a Christian that says the effort.
And sometimes I come across and people just don’t really know how to take my personality or my parenting style,
which I share a lot about that on the show, and that’s okay. Not being worried about hurting other people’s feelings was a lesson I really had to learn,
though, because when they initially launched, I wanted everybody to be happy. But when I realized I wasn’t going to make everybody happy,
it actually wasn’t too hard for me to accept that, because that’s just part of life. So lesson number three is don’t worry about hurting other people’s feelings.
Lesson number four is that systems or king. Now this is not a new lesson. We all know this in business.
I can’t remember what I’m doing. Like when I’m walking into the kitchen. My brain is constantly multitasking,
and whether it’s that I’m not taking care of my brain because I’m 43 years old or whether or not I just have too much on my mind.
If I didn’t have systems in place for this podcast, I would be completely lost. And so if you’re thinking about producing content,
whether it’s through a podcast or their weekly video or through you know any other capacity, it is absolutely important that you have systems that you follow to create your content.
Thio Make sure and double check that everything has been created, that it is produced graphically or in what other way,
as faras like sound mixing if you’re in podcasting and that it comes out in a predictable way every single time with checklists everywhere so that no step is missed.
Systems are absolutely king and even more specifically for those of you guys who are wanting to podcast, that’s lesson number four.
Can you guys hear The maid’s with housekeeping is coming down the hall, so let’s see if we can get through this podcast episode together.
Welcome to my mom. Laptop lifestyle dance Mom, Lacrosse Mom working from wherever podcasting life. Okay, Lesson number five.
It’s never gonna be perfect. This one’s hard, and I’ll be honest for you. It’s super hard for me.
I want everything to be the very best it can, but sometimes have had to record shows. And I’m really not ready or I’m sick or I’ve lost my research or I hate the topic or I’m sitting in a dang hotel room and I’m trying to finish recording this episode for you because he’s,
er 10 really great lessons and I want you to have them in Housekeeping is coming down the hall, and I know if I don’t finish recording this thing by the time the kids were done with rehearsal,
that I’m gonna have to pick it back up again two days from now. It’s never gonna be perfect,
You guys, This is par for the course off, being a lifestyle entrepreneur, especially if you have family.
So I had to learn that lesson fast, but it still sucks. I hate that lesson. That’s the worst one of all.
You never get over it, but more that’s more of like something you have to accept. Lesson number five.
Some people flat out won’t like you. I have never been the most popular girl in the room. In fact,
when I was a teen. I was that really bad girl that smoked pot when I was 13 and was doing things I shouldn’t have been doing that other girl’s parents didn’t let them hang out with Still to this day,
people will go up Thio my ex step dad and say, Oh, you’re broken. April’s dad. Yeah,
we weren’t allowed to hang out with them. That’s the kind of the reputation that I always had. And I wasn’t that most popular person and some people won’t like me.
I’m okay with that when it comes to podcasting. You guys, when you go to put yourself out there,
there are people that are not gonna like what you have to say. They’re not gonna like the way you do things.
They’re not gonna like your philosophy. Who gives a shit? You are not doing what you’re doing for those people.
If you’re choosing to put yourself out there in any capacity as a woman and it’s a business leader, you have to be okay with the fact that not everybody’s gonna like you.
On top of that, the women are the worst. They’re the most critical when I say they like you and I aren’t one of them.
It’s the truth, and that culture is starting to change. And we’re seeing a lot more women supporting other women.
But I just want to be really honest with you, especially if you’re watching a podcast or reading a book or speaking on stage is there are some people that aren’t gonna like you,
and you need to be okay with that. You need to love you first in order to get through that.
So lesson number six is some people won’t like you. Lesson number seven is your hardest work pig. Go unnoticed.
This one actually sucks really bad. This is one of those ones, like number five, where not everything is going to be perfect.
Less in number seven, your hardest work may go on notice is when you’ve been working for hours on producing great show.
And if you’re not launching a podcast, this applies to you. If you wrote an amazing article or created a video Siri’s you were really excited about and you put it out there and you work your butt off and you think it’s fantastic in some people won’t even notice that you did it now,
we could take a whole entire episode to talk about the marketing strategy on how to get your hard work noticed.
But I want you to know that sometimes you put things out there and people don’t pick it up the way that you expect.
And you have to be willing to pick yourself up, get past that look at the lessons learned from it,
or maybe just hold it for a little bit. It re release it at another time. So there have been some shows that I have recorded that I’ve put out there and I’m like,
Oh, my gosh, this is it My audience needs is so bad. And the numbers, the downloads don’t reflect how popular I thought that particular show is gonna be.
And that can be frustrating. So just be okay with the fact that sometimes it’s not gonna be noticed.
But you’re all right and keep going along your course. You know, the people that need your content,
it will get to them. Lesson number eight is to trust your team. I am not a natural delegator.
I don’t do well with having a staff and honestly, just keeping it real. Here I really don’t like having to stop and take the time and communicate with people,
even though they work for me and what they’re doing is to help me. It just doesn’t fit into who I am as a person in.
So I’ve had to learn to trust my team. This is a very entrepreneur mentality that I have, and it’s a weakness of mine.
But when it comes to a podcast recording, you have to be able to trust your podcast production team.
You need to be on top of things when they’re due. You need to supply the deliverer bols, whether that is,
you know, design and graphics or research or obviously the audio behind your show, and you have to be ableto have a team in place so that you can produce a great show.
I know very few entrepreneurs that are profitable, successful six plus figure business women that produce their own podcast.
That usually is not the way that it goes. It’s very time consuming and you want to be ableto have the budget to be able to hire out to other people for their area of expertise,
for you to launch your own podcast show. I know that there are so many of you guys out there that want to launch a podcast and you’re willing to do the hard work in the beginning on your own to get it off the ground.
That’s awesome. I love that. I love how scrappy that is. And I love that you are gonna need a podcast production team or a podcast team to distribute your content soon.
So this lesson number eight trust your team is to find a team you love as soon as you can in delegate the heck of your thing.
Hit the heck out of your things to you them so that they can help your show reach more people and higher levels.
Lesson number nine is to plan ahead through this show. It’s really taught me the power of strategic planning when I’m sharing certain content.
So, for example, in this show, you notice in the beginning I was able to share that sweet,
lifelong TRIBE business Launch program is opened If I didn’t plan ahead in my business to know when my coaching programs were opening,
when my retreats were opening, when my master mind was available to apply for that I wouldn’t be able to fit it into the business model and the structure of this show.
So the lesson here is to make money from podcasting. You need to plan ahead so that you know what you’re selling when you’re selling it,
how people have an opportunity to work with you, how to incorporate that into your show, whether it’s self sponsorship of the show or being able to share what you’re selling sporadically throughout the year.
And that comes with the power of planning ahead, both your episodes and how to make money in your business.
How the show’s flow into what it is that you’re offering for your audience. And then the very last lesson is number 10.
Don’t be afraid to sell now. I don’t want this to be a contradiction toe what I said in lesson number two,
Remember when I was talking about a few people who have come on here and all they want to do is sell their stuff to you guys?
That’s not what I’m talking about. When this show first launched back in 2017 I went overboard to never mention any of my programs.
I never told our listeners how they could join my programs, how they could work with me privately. I never did that.
I actually did like the total opposite because the purpose of this show isn’t to sell my business programs. The purpose of this show,
our mission. It is to equip a 1,000,000 women to design their life through entrepreneurship by giving them the springboard and the free tools to do it.
So I did not sell you guys for a really, really long time. I wanted the show to be a love offering,
not a sales pitch. And I hated listening to those podcast where the advertisements would come on, and it would just be trying to sell me stuff.
I wanted to make sure this show is different. So for the entire first year rarely gave people an opportunity to work with me personally.
And then in 2018 a listener wrote to me, asking if there was any way that she could hire me to help grow her business.
I had honestly done such a terrible job of of reverse not selling to my listeners that I was not clear that I’m a business launch coach.
I have been coaching women to design lunch and scale their business for 22 years, and I didn’t make that clear on the show.
And so she wrote just Bagan of those anyway, that she could work with me because the podcast website is a separate website than my business development,
my business coaching website for those of you guys that don’t know that, So when you go to the podcast website,
you don’t see like these big banners to say, Hire a bruise, your business coach That’s not what it’s for.
And so she didn’t know. And I realized at that point in time that I was literally doing my listeners a disservice by not making it clear that I can help them get beyond where they are in their business and take their business to the next level.
Today, I mentioned advanced business trainings were things like sweet life launch so that people know who are listening and absorbing this,
who are really ready to get to the next level or really want somebody to personally work with them that they can relate to that.
Absolutely. I would love to work with you to help you grow your business But that was a lesson that took me over a year to learn.
Don’t be afraid to make available what you have. Don’t go over word like I did and not sell to people or not articulate how you can transform their life for their business because you want to prove another point or you want to.
You know, be a mission to the world and make sure that people know exactly how you can get them Results both through your podcast if you’re launching a podcast or through the content that you share,
if you aren’t launching a podcast for the content that you put out in social media Ah, lot of people just put out content or social media with no call the action saying,
Hey, do you need more help? I’m here for you. Don’t be afraid to sell your service.
Is those air than 10 lessons I learned from three years of podcasting? Let me just give you a really quick recap.
Lesson number one was to know my listeners and to sort my shows and my content accordingly so that my listeners could find exactly what they were looking for or know that they shouldn’t listen to a show lesson.
Number two was to be picky about my guests and stop getting these dudes on here that want to pitch themselves and on Lee.
So all of their stuff to you guys. And so our application process is pretty extensive on how we pre screen guests to be on this show.
If any of you ever applied before, I just want you to know that that’s why her application process is the way that it is.
I would love to have you on the show, and I’d love to have you apply Number three. Don’t worry about her.
The other people’s feelings some people just don’t necessarily resonate with your message. And being brutally honest in the content that you share on your show is okay.
And that’s who you are. And you need to do you. Lesson number four. The systems Air King that self explanatory.
Get systems down, don’t divert from them and follow them to the tea less Number five is. It’s never gonna be perfect,
and you might need to record from places that you didn’t expect to, and your audio might not be perfect.
Your show might not be perfect but getting it out there is better than never getting another cause you’re waiting for a perfection.
Number six is Some people just won’t like you. And that is totally okay. Number seven is your hardest work may go unnoticed.
Number eight is to trust your team. Number nine was to plan ahead and number 10 was Don’t be afraid to sell.
Okay, So on this show I spoke directly to those of you guys. They’re considering launching a podcast.
But again, these lessons can reply across the board to your business, to content you’re creating on social media and I hope you take them to heart.
I would love for you to not have to go through some of the hard lessons that I learned and not waste some of your time.
Like I have wasted my And in closing, I just want you to know not to be afraid. Tow,
Launch your show, but toe on Lee, launch a podcast. If you are totally ready to be committed to it.
You don’t want to be that podcast that launched and only recorded, like 20 episodes. Unless, of course,
that’s the design of the content you’re delivering in second The second part of closing, of course, is that if you would like to launch your business,
or if you’d like to launch a podcast in conjunction with Growing Your business, then cruise over to sweet Life co dot com and join me in sweet life Watch.
Let’s get your business and your podcast movie. Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I love hearing from you guys and really quick.
Before we leave, I want to give a shout out Thio. This week’s podcast review. This review is from Lisa Marie Pepe,
she said. One of the best podcast for women April is the real deal. Authentic, savvy, funny and inspiring.
And she offers a listener practical and easy things to implement with action steps, all of which are instrumental and being a successful entrepreneur.
Whether you’re just starting up or a been in business for several years, I guarantee the sweet life entrepreneur a podcast.
We’ll provide you with everything you need to succeed in life in business. Do yourself a favor and subscribe.
Now. Lisa Marie, thank you so much for being a listener to the show. I appreciate you so much,
and if you would like to get a shout out on the podcast cruise overto abou podcasts and leave us review.
Or you can also cruise over to my Facebook page. You can find me in April Beach on Facebook and leave this review on Facebook as well,
and for all of the show notes of everything we talked about in today’s show, including the podcast statistics in the data that I dropped in a ruling cool graphic that comes along with that data and cruise over to sweet life.
Podcast dot com forward slash 1 62 All right, I’ll talk to you guys next week.
That’s all folks!

Episode 161: How To Build A 6 Figure Coaching Business While Working 9-5 – with April Beach and Luisa Zhou

Luisa Zhou SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?


Who This Episode Great For:

  1. You’re working 9-5 and want to launch your own business and break free but you don’t know-how.
  2. You want your own thriving 6-figure coaching business.
  3. You plan to keep working until your new company takes off.

Show Highlights:

  • 3 simple steps to launch your new business while still working your 9-5
  • What you can offer and sell while still working your full-time job
  • How to grow your email list while you’re still working
  • How to serve clients while still working
  • How to get over the fear of charging higher fees in the very beginning

About the Guest:

Luisa Zhou is the creator of the Employee to Entrepreneur system, which teaches people how to leave their day job and start their own six-figure plus business working for themselves.

Luisa’s helped thousands of students, including health and business coaches, designers, copywriters, and consultants, to launch their own businesses that generate anywhere from 30K to 100K in less than a year.

Luisa’s advice has been featured in numerous online and print publications including Forbes, Inc, Entrepreneur, Success magazine, and more.

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Luisa Zhou’s Free Gift | Your 9-5 Escape Velocity Plan Ready to leave your 9-5? Download the free step-by-step business launch calendar Join the SweetLife Facebook Community

Resources Mentioned:

Louisa Zhou’s Website Louisa Zhou on Instagram Join SweetLife Launch™ – 90 Day Business Launch Mentorship

April Beach on Instagram The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on YouTube

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age. Hi there. And welcome back to the show. I’m April Beach lifestyle business development expert for women, and you are in the right place, especially if you’re ready to grow your business, continuing to grow your business and you want to leave your 9 to 5. Today’s show is about how to build a six figure coaching business while still working your 9 to 5.
And this is a perfect episode for those of you guys who are in phase one or phase two off my lifestyle Entrepreneur Road map. My lifestyle entrepreneur system. That is a five step process that takes you from the idea of having your business all the way through arriving company. That gives you a lifestyle freedom. And if you don’t know where you are in the Lifestyle entrepreneur road map, then cruise over to sweet life co dot com forward slash quiz. Or you can simply text the word Sweet life, which is one word to the number 31996 and you’ll be sent a short link where you could take a short self assessment.
And that’s gonna tell you exactly where you are right now in business development, and you’re going to get the complete map so you’ll see the whole entire overview of where you’re going and a list of what you should be working on right now. So again, this episode is for those of you guys who are in face one or in phase two of my lifestyle Entrepreneur Road map. This is also a great episode for those of you guys. They’re still working your 9 to 5, and you want to launch your own business.
You want to break free and you don’t really know how. And here’s what you can expect. At the end of listening to this episode, you’re gonna know three simple steps to launch your new business. While you’re still working your old job, you are gonna understand what you can offer and sell While you’re still working your full time job, you will know how to grow your email list while you’re still working your full time job. How to serve clients, which is tough, especially when you’re still working here full time job,
and you’re also gonna know how to get over your fear of charging high prices in the very beginning so that you can, in fact, realistically replace your full time job. But before we dive into today’s episode, I want to make sure that you have an opportunity to join Sweet Life Launch, especially if you’re looking for support and a step by step plan toe. Leave your 9 to 5 Sweet Life Launch is our signature business launch program for women Just like you. It’s a 90 day business launch program with coaching private mentor ship group Mentorship.
Plus, you get an extra month of support, so it’s actually a four month program that gives you the exact steps toe. Launch your six figure business and leave your 9 to 5. No more being lost or confused or not knowing how to start or what to do or what’s a good use of your time. Sweet life Launch is my signature program, and it only opens a couple times a year, and that program is opening here in the month of February. If you’re listening to this podcast live visit Sweet Life launch dot com For all the details in today’s listener,
shout out Goes to Jamie, Fight with Jamie Fight Nutrition Jamie, thank you so much for being crazy. Amazing faithful listener of this podcast for showing up to almost every single one of our Instagram lives for connecting with us. Commenting on our stuff in sharing this show faithfully, You guys check out Jamie Fight Jamie Fight Nutrition Jamie is also ah, private client of mine. She’s been in my private business mentorship program and in Sweet Life Launch and this woman is a go getter. This woman is one of the hardest workers I have ever met Mom of four daughters and she just released her first book.
So, Jamie, thanks for being an awesome listener. And if you would like a shout out on this show, just leave us a review on Apple or on our Facebook page, and I can’t wait to highlight your business as well. Okay, on today’s show, we have a really awesome guest. Louisa Joe is here, and I loved talking to her because everything we talk about, she followed this step to a T. Louisa Joe is the creator of the employees to entrepreneur system, which teaches people how to leave their do don’t day job and start their own six figure plus business working for themselves.
She’s helped thousands of students, including health and business coaches, designers, copywriters and consultants launch your own business that generate anywhere from 30,000 to $100,000 in less than a year. Her advice has been featured in numerous online and print publications, including Forbes, Entrepreneur, Success Magazine and More So. Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast Louisa, give yourself an intro here. Somebody knows who you are. Yeah, thank you so much for having me. So, guys Super brief intro About six plus years ago, I was in 95.
I was struggling Thio replace my income and build my own business. And through a series of mistakes and lessons which we’re gonna talk about today, I took my job skills at the time in digital advertising and use that to build a coaching business which broke six figures before I turned in my notice. After that, people start asking me, Hey, how’d you do it? And I I was thinking, you know what? It took me so long, so many mistakes. I’m gonna help you. And so that gradually transitioned to my current business,
which I’ve been in for going on 56 years now. And what I do is help people go from employee to entrepreneur. So awesome. Great. We’re gonna get dive through this system here today. Let me ask you a question. What did it feel like? Still being in your job? Like, what were some of those initial triggers? When you’re like, I have got to get out of here, let the heck am I gonna do because we are talking. I mean, in the grand scheme of time,
this is a short period of time. But in online business, this is a long time ago in a galaxy far, far away. 56 years ago, online business was just, you know, up in coming. And a lot of people in online business now have only been here for the last 24 months. So when we’re talking five or six years ago, how on earth did you come up with this idea? Because still very few people had this business model agreed back then, coaching I what I remember.
So before that I spent two or three years thinking, you know, I need to leave. I needed a have more control. I don’t want to be like in another 10 years like my v p s v p pushing like doing power points in the same old same old. Yeah, but like you said, drink time coaching was not really that comment of a thing. And so all I saw, the only examples were like, you know, do you affiliate stuff or, you know, learn to be a copywriter and make a few $100 a month.
And I was sitting there thinking, There’s no way that could replace my income. I’m gonna have to go,
I don’t know, moving with my parents or something on I. I wasn’t going to do that. And so I just remember researching so long.
Just Google searches. Whatever I could think of online business, you know, leave job, whatever. Until one day I started seeing coaching,
I can remember the first coach I saw. It was, I think was very gradual, like I didn’t hit me the first time I saw some Microsoft Excel coaches.
I saw some career coaches and I tried doing that a little bit myself and I got some clients through those which made me realize,
Oh, whoa, coaching is a thing. And then I saw one or two people who said, Hey,
I built a six figure multiple, six bigger coaching business. I thought, All right, I can do this to let me figure this out So it’s a very gradual process 11 and I want a diamond more to the emotional side of it,
because I think it’s so important. But let’s dig into the strategies first. So somebody’s in there 9 to 5 job,
you know, They’re thinking, Oh, my gosh, this is me. She’s speaking my language, but I don’t know how to exit out here.
You’re gonna walk us through those steps today. So Step one, you actually say, Start with the coaching itself.
Talk a little bit about that. Yes. So the key is with building a business while in your job,
you need a few things. You need something that is relatively higher value, so you don’t need to sell like 1000 products every month to replace your income.
You also need something that allows you to do it while working a full time job so it can’t take 80 hours a week on the side.
So what I did was I realized, OK, the coaching model fits beautifully into this because if you start out,
you sell something for 1000 1,502,000 or more, right? You. Let’s say you need to make $5000 a month,
or for me it was a little bit higher. Let’s say 10,000. Alright. At 2000 pop, five sales a month gets you to 10,000 month.
That’s doable. It ISS so really just taking. The number’s not building this big, huge thing, but just being really clear about what you’re offering and actually start with coaching people in a higher price,
usually to start out. Is that what you’re recommending? Yes, exactly and what this also does. It makes a massive difference because then when you are starting out,
you’re not relying on a beautiful website or how good your copyrighting remarketing is because no one starts out good at any of those.
All you’re doing is talking to people and sharing with them what you know and helping them so that they understand.
Oh, this person’s legit. They know what they’re talking about? I trust them enough to hire them,
right? And what I think is so cool about this is so most new entrepreneurs there sketched out about charging higher prices.
But the fact of the matter is, if you actually want to leave your 9 to 5 job, you need to create a valuable offer and you need to position yourself is valuable.
So the technical truth is by starting out with a really well priced coaching offer, you kind of don’t have anything to lose,
right? If somebody’s like, okay, I’m not paying youth two or $3000 you know, No big deal.
You, right now you want to get out of there, but you still have your job. It’s not like some other entrepreneurs were like,
Oh my gosh, I have to sell this program where we sea establish entrepreneurs like cutting their prices down if you’re still in your non.
If I Is it fair to say, start where you want to be exactly. I love that you said this because it’s such a flip toe.
How many people in John ob stink and how I thought to where I thought, You know, I need to be out.
I need to be out. But that’s the truth. I came to gradually realize. Oh, yeah.
If I don’t make a sale, it sucks. But I’m still gonna have food on the table. I move,
but I have a roof over my head. Right. So let’s make the sale with the perfect client.
That the price I want to sell it for. I think that’s so awesome. Okay, so and the second thing you talked about is leveraging groups.
So what does that look like when you’re new? A ce faras to coaching a consulting? Yes. So the beauty of starting with coaching people one on one is you know what?
You know, whatever that is. Health, relationship, career, whatever. Any industry, whatever you know,
however, what you don’t know is how other people will respond to the way you teach, right? So things that might seem super obvious to you.
You could have a client saying, Well, what can you slow down and talk me through it? So coaching a handful of clients one on one helps you develop your process for communicating what you know to them and helping them get the results.
And then after just I started seeing the systems and the parents after I would say about three clients, so it doesn’t take that many.
What you’re able to do is say, Okay, here’s my system and then transition into a group type model,
which were essentially, you still can do a lot of one on one coaching, but the biggest bottleneck for one on one.
Coaching us after you having to do like one call a week per client. You group those calls into one group call a week.
So you’re allowed. You’re able to take on more clients while spending about the same amount of time. And then,
instead of spending that called teaching the same material the time you can say, Hey, here’s this Google document I put up that I created through coaching my one on one clients,
right? I love that, and one of the things that we didn’t mention here, and I think that we need to hit on is you’re talking about building a business that somebody already has a skill in.
We have a lot of listeners that are trying to launch a business, and they’re also trying to launch a business in a new skill set.
Yeah, super hard. It’s definitely doable. Listen, ladies, you could do whatever the hell you want to do,
right? You can do anything you set your mind to. But what leases talking about and what you did is your first coaching business.
You launch by coaching other people with the skills you were doing at work. Yes, and I love that we’re talking about this because look,
even back then, I knew I wasn’t going to spend the rest of my life talking about adds it just did not appeal to me over what I thought about was at the time.
What’s my primary goal? It wasn’t necessarily that Build a business that I was gonna do forever. It was to build a business I enjoyed enough.
And that gave enough value for Mita be able to replace my income. And then you couldn’t say Okay,
What’s next? Exactly? Okay, that’s super cool. All right. And so in step number two,
we’re talking about scaling, right? So it’s creating this first course courses, air really popular. Not only are they popular,
so you have to identify that we’re kind of in this little bubble here, even though we think we’re in this huge world that saturated you guys.
When we’re talking about online business, we’re like, not even a drop in the bucket to what online business will be 5 10 years from hell.
And so people don’t really speak this language. Courses in membership sides and all those things are common to those of us that are in this space.
And for our listeners, they’re either very commoner. They’re becoming more common. But, you know, toe outside people that are not in the business online business,
space courses, air still like, Oh, wow, I can take an online course to learn how to do,
you know, Facebook ads. Or I can take an online course stiff, you know, learn how to meal plan on Sunday night or whatever in so courses are not saturated.
I say this to save courses are not saturate, and they’re an amazing way to skill your business. And so what you did is you created the course like what kind of course did you create And how did you roll that out when you were still working?
Yes. Okay. So something I’m gonna share both how I created it. And then like we were talking about earlier How I do not actually recommend that exact thing anymore.
So what I did was I took just like we talked about the stuff that I had put into documents from working with a handful of clients.
And I basically put it in your course. And it’s important to note I didn’t put up a fancy course website or anything like that.
I basically had some Google documents and PDS and put people into a Facebook group. And I knew that was gonna be great because I only charged a few $100 for it.
But also, I knew the value was gonna come from me showing up and basically like providing so much coaching and value,
just two people that they wouldn’t care. That wasn’t fancy pediatric or sight. And so I sold my first course that way.
Now, as we were talking about earlier, I hustled my butt off cause I didn’t know better. And I did an open and closed cart.
I said, Okay, I’m gonna start on the state after this day. You cannot buy it. And so I I just talked to so many people.
I you know, I made some sales, thankfully, but it was really stressful. So at this point,
what I recommend is a slightly different thing where you do the same, you know, systematize ation group coaching course material,
but do it in ongoing enrollment. So there’s no stress for all. I have to make this many sales by the state,
right and love that and and I’m I’m really glad you hit on that. Thank you so much because there are these open include,
like, I don’t recommend open and close launch courses for entrepreneurs that have, you know, kids and that you travel a lot.
There’s just really a lot of pressure and last year, doing like a big affiliate launch. And those were really for signature courses and not what you’re talking about here,
which are foundational courses. It’s really hard to fill a course if you’re a new entrepreneur. And so I’m glad that you should,
on the difference between just having it open for people to join as your business grows versus being like OK,
No, you’re out. And everybody is like putting all your eggs in one basket during one point in time.
Okay, so one of the things that I want you to hit on is your strategy for building your business to $1.1 million in sales in the 1st 11 months.
How exactly did you do that? Yeah. So basically, I did what we just talked about not recommending doing,
but again, there was a very specific situation, and I also again didn’t know better. So I worked with what I knew,
which was I’m good at connecting with people. When I do a live stream or a video, they connect with me Really?
Well, my content starting to gain traction. And so I did a massive course launch, and I went all in.
I don’t have kids, so yeah, putting that right out there like literally joining my launch. That’s all I did.
And I did a big program launch, and, you know, before I tested a few smaller launches,
so I knew my numbers. I knew how much to spend on cold traffic, my existing audience. If I was gonna have a Phillies,
I had all of those things mapped out. And so through one really big course launch, we ended up doing about $800,000 in sales.
That was the result of having like a first A $10,000 loans than $100,000 launch and then scaling it up.
And then those previous launches in that year. Plus, my coaching brought me to over 1.1 million. Yeah,
that’s so awesome. It’s so impressive. So for those people that are still listening to the 95 they’re like,
they’re in the 95 they’re listening to this, they’re like, OK, I don’t need to be at 1.1 million Know what Oh,
I need to do right now where I am Obviously Step one, We said, start actually coaching people.
You talk about creating this first package, and we talked about that and making sure that first packages is a higher price.
And then you talked about creating like a mini horse or a smaller course so people can get your information with you scaling your time.
So you’re not trading, you know, dollars for hours. Now what did they do? They’re still there,
and they’re like, OK, this process might take a little while. What’s the next step they do after that?
What’s coming next? Yes, so after that, it really is Look, you’ve got your product in place.
You know how What content to put out, To get people to talk to you. You know how to do sales and you’re starting to build some testimonials and social proof online.
So then the big focus is not on creating new products or figuring out some, like, distracting things like that.
It’s so how can I get in front of more people? And so there are a few different ways depending on where you are in your existing assets.
So for some of the people I’ve worked with over the years, they have a massive existing network. I didn’t.
But some people d’oh and so literally they can sell out their programs. I’m a very common example. Is career coaches right?
You’ve built up your career. Your network knows how good you are at it. You say I’m gonna be doing career coaching.
It could be relatively easier. Still not easy, but relatively to sell that out through that network. Another option for most people who don’t have the network is to start on social media right where you’re building up your own.
Let’s say Facebook community, instagram community, whatever that looks like and really connecting with people better than you can do through email or traditional formats so that your for me a connection faster.
You’re building a two way relationship, and you are really driving more sales. That personally made a big difference for me.
I was on Facebook. I wasn’t other Facebook groups. I created my own, and I was just talking to people in there all day,
whenever I had my lunch break before after work, just showing up and building that and then another source.
That makes a big difference, but it takes longer. Is organic traffic you to blogging that I don’t recommend?
You don’t necessarily need to be able to replace your income. Instead, What I teach and what I did as well is using hate traffic.
Now the key is not to spend a ton of money up front or anything. It’s on Lee. After you’ve gotten clients organic,
not gambling on social media or through your network. You know what sells and you have a feel for who your audience is and proven data for all of that.
You take all of that, you drive ads and you know you can do an e mail system funnel.
You can do a webinar, really? Just taking what you’ve realized people want and need to hear before they’re ready to hire you.
Putting it into that putting ads in that, testing each process in approaching it methodically with the data you’ve gathered to then be able to know.
Okay, everyone, dollar I spend, I make this much money and then you scale that I love it.
I love it. And I love you. Said that to paid ads. And again, a lot of entrepreneurs starting from scratch don’t necessarily have that ad budget.
But those guys that are still in your 9 to 5 have a little bit more, you know, inventive instead of your little started right.
And there is such a difference between, you know, paid ads, earned media and sweat equity. And although all of them are important to do in the big picture of your business,
the fastest way to grow your audience is through paid ads. And frankly, when you’re working 9 to 5 job,
you don’t have the extra time to put in all this. What equity to be sitting there doing, You know,
all these live streams, all day long and hanging out. You know, especially for those of our listeners are like,
Oh, shit. I have, like, five kids and I’m travelling commute two hours a day. How on earth am I gonna do this,
girls, By the way, we know you could do this. And that’s why Louise and I are here talking to you about this on the show.
We have got your back. Tell our listeners where they can find you. Had it connected to your energy is awesome.
I just love what you brought to the show today. Oh, thank you so much. So, yeah,
there are a few places Thio connect with me. The first is out through my website, right. So And I have ah,
special pdf for your listeners, which is a pdf on how to build your own online six bigger coaching business.
And that is at Louisa joe dot com slash gift. Now, let me spell my name really quickly because it’s not spelled out.
It sounds It’s l u I s a z, as in zebra, h o u dot com slash gift.
And then if you get that, pdf you’re gonna be added to my email list. You’re gonna learn about my programs.
You’re gonna get lots of amazing content from me. So that’s how well, the best way to stay in touch.
I’m also on Instagram. I’m loving instagram right now. And on my count is Luisa Dodge. Oh,
so same thing, just a dot in the middle. But those are the really two best ways to connect with me right now.
I love it, and then we should do fun. Instagram live for this show. If you guys are listening to this this week,
tune in and it will promote this up on instagram for you guys to All right. Thank you so much for being there.
And we’ll make sure all of those links are in our show Notes. Thank you. Thanks for listening to this episode of The Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast.
I’m a pro beach. I’m so glad that you were here. This is episode number 1 61 So everything we talked about and all the links can be found by visiting suite life podcast dot com forward slash 161 I’ll talk to you next
That’s all folks!

Episode 160: How to Choose Your New Business Idea – with Kat McLead

Kat McLead SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach


Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Highlights:
  1. Kat’s four steps to coming up with your business idea.
  2. Kat’s take on purpose vs. profit.
  3. Why you should focus on the skills you already have rather than trying to start a business that requires you to learn a new one.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:
Kat Mclead is the creator of the Stay at Home Mom Entrepreneur: the proven framework for creating a highly profitable business that you love while working 2 hours a day.
She started her first multiple 6-figure business 20 years ago and hasn’t slowed down since — not even after having her son. A fun fact: That business’s profits meant that she had way more money than her husband when they first got married, and was able to pay the entire $450,000 down payment on their home. Not that he minded!
So, if you’re thinking about starting a business or you’ve already launched one, but it’s not doing as well as you’d like, you don’t want to miss this episode!
How to Take Action:
    1. Take a screenshot of this episode in your favorite podcast app, post it to Instagram, tag me (@sweetlife_entrepreneur), and let me know your favorite part!
    2. Join Kat McLead’s Facebook Group | Pinpoint Your High Profit High Purpose Business for Mompreneurs
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Kat McLead’s Website

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #00: Lifestyle Entrepreneur Manifesto

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #06: Create & Dominate Your Block Calendar

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #97: Don’t Use Block Calendar Strategy? It Might Be Costing You Money

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #15: If You Can’t See It, You Can’t Be It: How to Write Your Own Story

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #65: Doing Things That Don’t Scale – with John Lee Dumas

Episode 159: How to Become An Influencer In Your Industry – Part 2 – with Kathy Haan

Kathy Haan SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach


Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!

Episode Highlights:
  1. The last five strategies to get influencer marketing.
  2. Kathy’s hacks for getting branding photography for FREE!
  3. The secret media weapon the major influencers know about that you can utilize as well.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

If you haven’t listened to Part 1 of my interview with Kathy Haan, you’ll want to make sure you do that before listening to this episode.

Kathy Haan is a business coach, travel blogger, influencer, podcaster, and travel agency owner. You can find her work featured in places like Forbes, USA Today, Cosmopolitan, and Thrive Global. When she’s not at home in Iowa with her husband, three children, and two enormous Great Pyrenees dogs, you can usually find her traveling the world, creating content, and storytelling on stages.

Take a listen to this final part with Kathy to understand why she says, “The best way to gain authority is to borrow it from someone else,” and how you can become an influencer in your industry!

How to Take Action:
    1. Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!
    2. Connect with Kathy Haan (@kathyhaan) and myself (@sweetlife_entrepreneur) on Instagram
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Kathy Haan’s Website

Kathy Haan’s Blog

Kathy Haan on Facebook

Kathy Haan on LinkedIn

Kathy Haan’s Media Page

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #158: How to Become An Influencer In Your Industry – Part 1 – with Kathy Haan

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #037: Building A Profitable Creative Business – With Jeff Goins

Jeff Goins’ Book: Real Artists Don’t Starve

Help A Reporter Out (HARO)

One Model Place


Episode 158: How to Become An Influencer In Your Industry – Part 1 – with Kathy Haan

Kathy Haan SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach


Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!

Episode Highlights:
  1. What influencer marketing is.
  2. Why you need influencer marketing.
  3. The first three strategies to get influencer marketing.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

This is not an episode about how to have a million followers. If you care more about the numbers than the results you deliver and the relationships you build, you will fail.

However, if you want to learn from a true international influencer whose story and work has changed lives and if you want to develop your influencer marketing plan for the right reasons, this is the episode for you.

Kathy Haan is a business coach, travel blogger, influencer, podcaster, and travel agency owner. You can find her work featured in places like Forbes, USA Today, Cosmopolitan, and Thrive Global. When she’s not at home in Iowa with her husband, three children, and two enormous Great Pyrenees dogs, you can usually find her traveling the world, creating content, and storytelling on stages.

Kathy had so many amazing insights and tips that we’ve decided to split this episode into two parts. So, make you don’t miss part two.

How to Take Action:
    1. Join us for Speakers Summit Virtual Mastermind!
    2. Connect with Kathy Haan (@kathyhaan) and myself (@sweetlife_entrepreneur) on Instagram
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Kathy Haan’s Website

Kathy Haan on Facebook

Kathy Hann on LinkedIn

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #156: How To Create Your 2020 Strategic Plan: A Guide For Lifestyle Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

The SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode #146: How to Become A Speaker and Use Stages To Grow Your Business – with Pete Vargas

Hal Elrod’s Website

Hal Elrod on Instagram

Hal Elrod’s Podcast | Achieve Your Goals with Hal Elrod

Hal Elrod’s Book | The Miracle Morning: The Not-So-Obvious Secret Guaranteed to Transform Your Life (Before 8AM)


Episode 156: How To Create Your 2020 Strategic Plan: A Guide For Lifestyle Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach


Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Join Commitment Week 2o20

Episode Highlights:
  1. What a strategic plan is and why you need one for your business.
  2. The three steps to identifying your strategic plan.
  3. The five core areas you should focus on when creating your strategic plan.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

You’ve been dreaming big and know that the next decade will define your life, you just may not know exactly how yet.

Now is the time to claim your leadership, influence, and role in your own future – and that starts with your business.

Based on what we’ve seen the past few years and what the trends and research tells us about the next decade, there are five core areas you should be focusing on when planning for 2020 and beyond.

This podcast episode will help you lay out your strategic plan to kick start your best decade ever.

How to Take Action:
    1. Join Commitment Week 2o20
    2. Take the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap Quiz to find out where you’re at in your business so you know what to focus on in 2020!
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Mel Robbins

April Beach on Instagram

Episode 155: Clear Space To Make Big Moves In 2020: Detox and Declutter Your Business – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach


Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Take the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap Quiz to find out where you’re at in your business so you know what to focus on in 2020!

Join Commitment Week 2o20

Episode Highlights:
  1. Software recommendations that will help clean things up in your business.
  2. Routines that will help you get in the flow of a clean mind and business and remove distractions.
  3. Different ways this podcast and the SweetLife Entrepreneur community can help you move into 2020 in an intentional way.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

As a mom who owns two companies and has three boys, the reality is that sometimes my life gets a little messy.

Unfortunately, this carries over into my businesses and I just can’t do great work or produce very well when things are cluttered and disorganized.

I know you’re planning big things for 2020 so, if you’re anything like me, let’s help declutter your business so you can focus on the things that will bring you those big results.

Whether you’ve just gotten your first idea for a business or you’ve been in business for years, this episode is going to help you sort through the mess in your mind, clean-up your business, and start this next decade off on the right foot so it can change the course of the rest of your life.

How to Take Action:
    1. Take the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap Quiz to find out where you’re at in your business so you know what to focus on in 2020.
    2. Join us for Commitment Week 2020.
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.


Links Mentioned:



13 Outlook Productivity & Organization Tips

3 Differences Between Goals and Intentions

Marie Forleo

Kookslams on Instagram

April Beach on Instagram

Episode 154: Lifestyle Entrepreneurship: How To Manage Business, Marriage, Parenting, and Self Care As An Entrepreneur Couple – with April and Aaron Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach


Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Check out Burn the Picket Fence™: Behind-the-scenes of a lifestyle entrepreneur family

Episode Highlights:
  1. How entrepreneurship has affected our marriage, intimacy, and communication.
  2. How we teach our boys to brand themselves and chase their dreams.
  3. The family meeting and mastermind schedule we use to take control.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:
I often get asked how we manage such a chaotic life with business and kids. The truth is, it’s not glamorous. Aaron and I struggled a lot in the beginning.
When you’re growing multiple businesses with three boys and facing the reality of living with medical needs, marriage challenges, lifestyle changes and the desire to control your future… it’s never easy, but that’s okay because what you’re fighting for is worth it.
If you’re concerned about how entrepreneurship is affecting your kids, you feel like your marriage is struggling, or you want to hear family systems you can use in your life, this is the episode for you.
You love hard. You work hard. And you want to do great things. And you shall.
How to Take Action:
    1. Check out Burn the Picket Fence™: Behind-the-scenes of a lifestyle entrepreneur family.
    2. Take a screenshot of this episode in your favorite app, tag me on Instagram (@sweetlife_entrepreneur), and let me know what part you resonated with the most.
    3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.

Links Mentioned:

Burn the Picket Fence™

April Beach on YouTube

April Beach on Instagram

Episode 153: 3 Simple Ways To Manage December and Prepare Your Life And Business For 2020 Success – with Joy Wilder

Joy Wilder SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach


Subscribe: iTunes | Google Podcasts | SpotifyAndroid Devices | iHeart Radio | TuneIn | Stitcher | Facebook Messenger
Episode Tools:

Grab your FREE copy of Joy Wilder’s Top 11 Apps That Will Change Your Life!

Episode Highlights:
  1. How to set a vision and boundaries for the month of December.
  2. How to outsource and delegate specifically in the month of December.
  3. How to micro-plan your last two weeks of December.
Why This Episode Is Awesome:

December is a chaotic time of year for most people even if they’re not running their own business like you are. If you’re feeling especially overwhelmed you can’t miss this episode with Joy Wilder.

Joy is the founder of the Brilliant Life™ Business and Micro-Planning™ Systems where she helps women design insanely successful businesses around a life they love without sacrificing their family or themselves.

Joy’s a certified business coach and specializes in Micro-Planning™, helping others turn their passion into profit and optimizing existing businesses’ profitability. She’s the mom of four children under the age of eight, owner of three small businesses, and former Location Pastor.

She has a passion for coaching others to live their Brilliant Life™ while impacting their communities for good.

When not raising her businesses and babies, Joy loves date nights with her husband, is a spinning junkie and a Settlers groupie.

How to Take Action:
  1. Grab your FREE copy of Joy Wilder’s Top 11 Apps That Will Change Your Life!
  2. Take a screenshot of the episode, tag @joywilder2 and @sweetlife_entrepreneur, and put in your post what you’re going to do to rest this December.
  3. Join me in my business mentorship and mastermind, SweetLife Launch.